HTC 0P3P500 Smartphone User Manual Your HTC One max
HTC Corporation Smartphone Your HTC One max
HTC >
Contents
- 1. User manual-1
- 2. User manual-2
- 3. User manual -1
- 4. User manual -2
- 5. User Manual -1
- 6. User Manual -2
- 7. User Manual 1
- 8. User Manual 2
User Manual -1
![Your HTC One maxUser guideOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-1.png)
![ContentsUnboxingHTC One max 7Back cover 8micro SIM card 10Storage card 11Charging the battery 12Switching the power on or off 12Want some quick guidance on your phone? 13Setting up your phoneSetting up your new phone for the first time 14Transferring content from an Android phone 15Transferring contacts from your old phone through Bluetooth 16Getting contacts and other content into HTC One max 17Transferring photos, videos, and music between your phone and computer 17Getting to know your settings 18About the Fingerprint sensor 18Updating your phone's software 20Your first week with your new phoneBasics 21Notifications 29Working with text 32Battery 37CameraCamera basics 41Taking a photo 42Recording video 42Taking continuous camera shots 43Camera scenes 44Improving portrait shots 44Taking a self portrait 44Taking HTC Zoe photos 44What is HTC Zoe? 45Taking a panoramic photo 45Using HDR 45Recording videos in slow motion 462 ContentsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-2.png)
![PersonalizingMaking HTC One max truly yours 47Changing your wallpaper 47Personalizing the launch bar 48Adding a widget to your Home screen 48Adding apps and other shortcuts on your Home screen 49Rearranging or removing widgets and icons on your Home screen 50Arranging apps on the All Apps screen 50Grouping apps into a folder 51Hiding or unhiding apps 52Adding, removing, or arranging widget panels 52Changing your main Home screen 53Changing the sounds for your ringtone, notifications, and alarm 53Rearranging application tabs 53Phone callsMaking a call with Smart dial 54Dialing an extension number 55Returning a missed call 55Using Speed dial 55Calling a phone number in a text message 56Calling a phone number in an email 56Calling a phone number in a Calendar event 56Making an emergency call 56Receiving calls 57What can I do during a call? 58Setting up a conference call 59Checking calls in the Call History 59Changing ringtone settings 60Home dialing 61MessagesSending a text message (SMS) 62Sending a multimedia message (MMS) 62Sending a group message 64Resuming a draft message 65Replying to a message 65Saving a text message in the Tasks app 66Forwarding a message 66Viewing and saving an attachment from a multimedia message 67Moving messages to the secure box 67Blocking unwanted messages 68WAP push messages 68Copying a text message to your micro SIM card 69Deleting messages and conversations 69Search and web browserSearching HTC One max and the Web 70Getting instant information with Google Now 71Browsing the Web 73Bookmarking a webpage 753 ContentsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-3.png)
![Using your browsing history 76Clearing your browsing history 77EntertainmentMusic 78TV 82Wireless media 88StorageTypes of storage 90Copying files to or from HTC One max 90Making more storage space 91Encrypting data on HTC One max 92PeopleYour contacts list 94Setting up your profile 95Adding a new contact 96Editing a contact’s information 97Getting in touch with a contact 97Importing or copying contacts 97Merging contact information 98Sending contact information 99Contact groups 100EmailGmail 102Mail 104Travel and mapsLocation settings 109Google Maps 109HTC Car 113Google Play and other appsGetting apps 117Essential apps 119Fun apps 123Productivity apps 126Internet connectionsData connection 128Managing your data usage 129Wi-Fi 130Connecting to a virtual private network (VPN) 132Using HTC One max as a wireless router 134Sharing your phone's Internet connection by USB tethering 135Connecting to the Internet through a computer 1364 ContentsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-4.png)
![Wi-Fi printing 136Wireless sharingConnecting a Bluetooth headset 138Unpairing from a Bluetooth device 139Where sent information is saved 139Receiving files using Bluetooth 140Sharing content with NFC 141Settings and securityChecking your phone's HTC Sense version 143Turning Airplane mode on or off 143Turning Do not disturb mode on and off 143Turning automatic screen rotation off 144Adjusting the time before the screen turns off 145Adjusting the screen brightness 145Touch sounds and vibration 145Changing the display language 146Accessibility settings 146Magnifying your phone's screen 146Working with certificates 147Protecting your SIM card with a PIN 147Showing or hiding notifications on the lock screen 148Protecting HTC One max with a screen lock 148Securing HTC One max with face unlock 149Bypassing the lock screen 150Trademarks and copyrightsIndex5 ContentsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-5.png)
![Conventions used in this guideIn this user guide, we use the following symbols to indicate useful and importantinformation:This is a note. A note often gives additional information, such as what happenswhen you choose to do or not to do a certain action. A note also providesinformation that may only be applicable to some situations.This is a tip. A tip gives you an alternative way to do a particular step or procedure,or lets you know of an option that you may find helpful.This indicates important information that you need in order to accomplish a certaintask or to get a feature to work properly.This provides safety precaution information, that is, information that you need to becareful about to prevent potential problems.6 Conventions used in this guideOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-6.png)
![UnboxingHTC One maxFront panel1. BACK2. USB connector3. HOME4. Dual speakers5. POWER6. VOLUME7. Front camera8. 3.5mm headset jack9. IR SENSOR10. Proximity sensor11. Notification LED12. Back cover lock§HTC One max is available in either a 3G or LTE version, depending on your regionand mobile operator. You need an LTE plan to use your operator's 4G/LTEnetwork for voice calls and data services. Check with your operator for details.§If you want to use a screen protector, please don’t cover and block the proximitysensor. Purchase a screen protector designed for HTC One max.7 UnboxingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-7.png)
![Back panel1. LED flash2. Main camera3. Fingerprint sensor4. Back coverBack coverRemoving the back cover1. Securely hold HTC One max facing down.2. Slide the back cover lock down, and then lift the back cover from the side. 8 UnboxingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-8.png)
![Replacing the back cover1. Align the back cover to the left side of the card slot compartment, and theninsert the tabs into the slots on the left. 2. Close the back cover and press starting from the top to the bottom. Make surethat there are no gaps on any side. 3. Press again on the right side to secure the cover into place, and then slide thelock all the way to the closed position. 9 UnboxingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-9.png)
![micro SIM cardHTC One max uses a micro SIM card. The micro SIM card contains your phonenumber, service details, and memory for storing phonebook contacts and/or textmessages.Inserting the micro SIM cardUse a standard micro SIM only. Inserting a smaller size SIM (such as nano SIM withan adapter or a modified SIM) may cause the card to not fit properly or damage thecard slot.1. Take the back cover off.2. With the micro SIM card’s gold contacts facing down and its cut-off cornerfacing in, insert the micro SIM card all the way into the micro SIM card slot. 3. Push the micro SIM card in until it clicks into place.10 UnboxingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-10.png)
![Removing the micro SIM cardMake sure to switch off HTC One max before removing your micro SIM card.1. Take the back cover off.2. Push the micro SIM card in to eject it from its slot, and remove it.Storage cardUse a storage card to store your photos, videos, and music.Inserting the storage card1. Take the back cover off.2. Insert the microSD™ card into the storage card slot with its gold contacts facingdown and push it into place. Unmounting the storage cardWhen you need to remove the storage card while HTC One max is on, unmount thestorage card first to prevent corrupting or damaging the files in the storage card.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Storage.2. Tap Unmount SD card.Removing the storage card1. Take the back cover off.2. Slide the storage card out from its slot.11 UnboxingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-11.png)
![Charging the batteryBefore you turn on and start using HTC One max, it is recommended that you chargethe battery.Use only the adapter and the USB cable that came with HTC One max to chargethe battery. When the battery power is too low, make sure to use the poweradapter to charge, not the USB cable connection with your computer.1. Insert the small end of the USB cable into the USB connector. 2. Insert the other end of the USB cable into the power adapter.3. Plug in the power adapter to an electrical outlet to start charging the battery.§As a safety precaution, the battery may stop charging to avoid overheating.§When you're using the Internet and charging the battery, HTC One max maybecome warmer. This is normal.§To conserve energy, unplug the power adapter from the electrical outlet after youfinish charging.Switching the power on or offSwitching the power onPress the POWER button. When you turn on HTC One max for the first time, you’ll need to set it up.12 UnboxingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-12.png)
![Switching the power off1. If the display is off, press the POWER button to turn it back on. If your screen isprotected with a lock screen, you need to unlock it.2. Press and hold the POWER button for a few seconds.3. Tap Power off on the options menu.Want some quick guidance on your phone?Exploring HTC One maxTips & Help lets you get the most out of HTC One max in seconds.§Ever have the feeling that you're not getting the most out of your phone?Browse through the friendly walkthroughs on Tips & Help to learn how. Thetopics range from intro to advanced and the Tips & Help feed on the Homescreen even recommends topics that you might like.§Need to know how to do something right away? Just type in some keywordsand get clear, up-to-date answers right on HTC One max.To open Tips & Help from the Home screen, tap > Tips & Help.If you haven't downloaded Tips & Help content yet, or if there's updated contentavailable, just tap the download link to get it.To change the sync settings of Tips & Help, tap > Update settings.Searching Tips & Help1. In Tips & Help, tap , and then enter the words you want to search for.2. Tap a search result to jump straight to that item.13 UnboxingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-13.png)
![Setting up your phoneSetting up your new phone for the first timeWhen you switch on your new phone for the first time, you’ll be asked to set it up.Walk through the on-device setup to choose your Internet connection, select how youwant to set up your new phone, and more.§Select Set up from scratch to set up your accounts and personalize your newphone from your computer using the HTC Get Started service. Your phone shows you the URL of the HTC Get Started site and a pair code. Onyour computer's web browser, just go to the URL and enter the pair code tostart your web setup. You need an HTC Account to save your accounts andsettings on the Web and download them to your phone.§If you already finished the HTC Get Started setup before turning on your newphone, just download your web setup. Choose to import content, and thenselect Apply HTC Get Started setup.§If you have content from an old phone, you can choose to do a direct phone-to-phone transfer.§To make it easier for you to back up and restore content from HTC One max toanother HTC phone in the future, select Back up phone daily.§To find out more about HTC Get Started and HTC Account, see the Help and FAQon the HTC Get Started site (www.htcsense.com/help/).§If you transferred content such as wallpaper and ringtone from an old phone, usingHTC Get Started to personalize and download the same content types from theWeb will change your settings on your new phone.§Some features that need to connect to the Internet such as location-basedservices and auto-sync of your online accounts may incur extra data fees. To avoidincurring data fees, disable these features under Settings.14 Setting up your phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-14.png)
![Transferring content from an Android phoneOn your old Android™ phone, download the HTC Transfer Tool and use it to transferyour content to your new HTC phone. The types of locally stored content on your oldphone that the tool can transfer include contacts, messages, calendar events, webbookmarks, music, photos, and videos. Some settings can also be transferred.§You need Android version 2.2 or later to use the HTC Transfer Tool on your oldphone.§If your old phone has Android version 2.1 or an earlier version, you need to useBluetooth® transfer. For details, see Transferring contacts from your old phonethrough Bluetooth on page 16.1. Do one of the following:§If you're setting up your new HTC phone for the first time, choose totransfer content, and then select Transfer from old phone on the Set upphone screen.§Go to Settings, and then tap Get content from another phone.2. Choose whether to transfer from an old HTC Android phone or other Androidphone.3. Tap Full transfer.4. Follow the steps shown on your new phone to download the HTC Transfer Toolfrom Google Play™ to your old phone, install it, and open the tool.5. When you see a PIN on your old phone, make sure the same PIN also appearson your new phone before you continue. If the PIN code doesn't appear, this may mean that your old phone is unable toconnect to your new phone. If this happens, tap Try another transfer method onyour new phone to use Bluetooth for transferring contacts from your old phone.15 Setting up your phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-15.png)
![6. On your old phone, choose the types of content you want to transfer, and thentap Transfer.7. Wait for the transfer to finish.8. Tap Done on both phones.Transferring contacts from your old phonethrough BluetoothUse Bluetooth to transfer contacts from an iPhone®, a phone that has Android version2.1 (or earlier version), or other types of phones. Depending on the capabilities of yourold phone, you may be able to transfer not only contacts but also other data such ascalendar events and text messages to your new HTC phone.Use HTC Sync Manager to transfer more types of content from an iPhone.1. Do one of the following:§If you're setting up your new phone for the first time, choose to transfercontent, and then select Transfer from old phone on the Set up phonescreen.§Go to Settings, and then tap Get content from another phone.2. Choose whether to transfer from an Android phone, iPhone, or other phonetypes. If you chose to transfer from an Android phone, tap Quick transfer.3. Choose your old phone's name and model.4. On your old phone, turn Bluetooth on and set it to discoverable mode.5. Follow the onscreen instructions on your old and new phones to pair them andstart the data transfer.16 Setting up your phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-16.png)
![Getting contacts and other content intoHTC One maxAside from the HTC Transfer Tool, there are other ways you can add contacts andother content to HTC One max.Sync with yourcomputerUse HTC Sync Manager to sync contacts, documents, playlists,and more between HTC One max and your computer running aWindows® or Mac OS® operating system.You can also use it to transfer contacts, messages, and othercontent from an iPhone to your computer, and then to yourHTC One max.Google® Account Google contacts are imported to HTC One max after you sign into your Google Account. You can also create more Googlecontacts right from HTC One max.Social networkaccountsLog in to your favorite social networks to sync contactinformation from them.Microsoft®ExchangeActiveSync®HTC One max syncs your work contacts from the MicrosoftExchange ActiveSync Server in your workplace.Phone contacts You can create contacts locally on HTC One max, if you don'tprefer to store them on your online accounts.SIM card Copy all your SIM contacts to HTC One max.Transferring photos, videos, and musicbetween your phone and computerThere are two ways you can transfer your media from or to your computer.§Connect HTC One max to your computer. Your computer will recognize it justlike any removable USB drive, and you can copy your media between them.§Download and use the HTC Sync Manager software on your computer. You canset it up to automatically get music, photos, and videos off HTC One max toyour computer. You can also sync playlists from your computer to the phone.If you have an iPhone, you can even connect it and transfer the camera roll(photos and videos) to your computer. Then reconnect HTC One max and copythem over.Tired of keeping copies of your media in several places? Use online storage servicesto put your media in one place so you can manage them anywhere — on yourcomputer, HTC One max, and other mobile devices.Go to Settings, and then tap Accounts & sync > to check first what online storageaccounts are available on HTC One max and sign in to the one you want to use. Usethe Gallery app to access media in your online storage.17 Setting up your phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-17.png)
![Getting to know your settingsWant to change the ringtone, set up a Wi-Fi® connection, or add your accounts? Dothis and more in Settings.1. Open Settings either from the Quick settings panel or the All Apps screen.§With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick settings,and then tap .§From the Home screen, tap to switch to the All Apps screen, and thentap Settings.2. Here are some of the basic settings you can change: §Tap the On/Off switch next to an item such as Wi-Fi to turn it on or off. Tapthe item itself to configure its settings.§Tap Sound to set a ringtone, choose a sound profile, and configureincoming call sound settings.§Tap Personalize to change the Home screen wallpaper, lock screen style,and more.§Tap Accounts & sync to add and sign in to your different accounts, such asemail, social networks, and more.§Tap Security to help secure HTC One max, for example with a screen lock.About the Fingerprint sensorYou can add an extra layer of security, quickly open apps, and navigate HTC One maxusing your fingerprint. You can add up to three fingerprints to use for unlocking thephone and launching apps.When setting up and using the fingerprint sensor, follow these tips:§Move your hand as you swipe the finger across the sensor, to avoid curling orpointing your finger.§Swipe vertically, not horizontally across the sensor.§Make sure your finger is dry and clean.§Don't swipe too quickly or slowly.§Make sure you're not pressing too hard (or lightly).Adding a fingerprintIf you didn't add your fingerprint when you first set up HTC One max, you can add itin Settings.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Fingerprint.2. Tap Continue.3. Choose which finger you want to use.18 Setting up your phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-18.png)
![4. Press your finger pad flat above the fingerprint sensor and then swipe yourfinger down the sensor. You'll be prompted to swipe it three more times. 5. After you've successfully recorded your fingerprint, tap Continue.6. Enter and confirm a backup password to be used in the event the phone doesn'trecognize your fingerprint.7. If you want to launch an app automatically after unlocking your phone, tap OKand choose the app you want.To change the backup password in the future, go to Settings and tap Fingerprint >Change backup password.Adding, removing, or editing fingerprintsYou can add more fingerprints to use, change fingerprint settings, and removefingerprints.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Fingerprint.2. Under Edit fingerprint, do either of the following:§Tap a recorded fingerprint, and then choose whether to remove it or selectan app to launch.§Tap Learn new fingerprint to add new fingerprints.Scrolling with the fingerprint sensorYou can use the fingerprint sensor to scroll up and down in apps such as Internet,Mail, and Messages. You don't need to have added a fingerprint to be able to use thefingerprint sensor to scroll.§Swipe up on the sensor to scroll up the screen.§Swipe down on the sensor to scroll down the screen.19 Setting up your phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-19.png)
![Updating your phone's softwareHTC One max can check and notify you if there’s a new update available. You can alsochoose to automatically download updates or manually check if there's an availableupdate.Installing a software updateWhen Internet connection is on and there's a new software update available, theupdate notification icon appears in the status bar.1. Slide the Notifications panel open, and then tap the system update notification.2. If you don't want to download the update using your data connection, selectUpdate over Wi-Fi only.3. Tap Download.4. When download is complete, select Install now, and then tap OK.After updating, HTC One max will restart.Installing an application updateWhen Internet connection is on and there's an available update for your HTC ormobile operator apps, the update notification icon appears in the status bar.1. Slide the Notifications panel open, and then tap the update notification. The Updates screen opens with the list of application updates to be installed.2. Tap an item to view its details, and then tap .3. When you're done reviewing the updates, tap Install. You'll be asked to restartHTC One max if needed.Enabling automatic updatesYou can choose to automatically download and install software updates for HTC ormobile operator apps. System software updates will also be automaticallydownloaded, but you need to confirm when to install the updates.1. Go to Settings, and then tap About.2. Tap Software updates > Auto update.Checking for updates manually1. Go to Settings, and then tap About.2. Tap Software updates. HTC One max checks if updates are available.If you don't have Internet connection, you'll be prompted to turn on mobile data orconnect to a Wi-Fi network. Once connected, tap Check now to check for updates.20 Setting up your phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-20.png)
![Your first week with yournew phoneBasicsTouch gesturesUse touch gestures to get around the Home screen, open apps, scroll through lists,and more.Tap§Tap the screen with your finger when you want to selectonscreen items such as application and settings icons, orpress onscreen buttons.§After you've scrolled down a long list or screen (in apps suchas Mail and People), tap the status bar to jump straight tothe top of your screen.Press and holdTo open the available options for an item (for example, acontact or link in a webpage), just press and hold the item.21 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-21.png)
![Swipe or slideQuickly swipe your finger vertically or horizontally across thescreen to go to other Home pages, scroll through documents,and more.DragPress and hold your finger with some pressure before you startto drag. While dragging, don't release your finger until youhave reached the target position.FlickFlicking the screen is similar to swiping, except thatyou need to swipe your finger in light, quickerstrokes, such as when moving right and left on theHome screen, or flicking through a contacts ormessage list.22 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-22.png)
![Press and flickOn the Home screen, you can easily move a widget oricon from one screen to another.Press and hold the widget or icon with one finger, andflick the screen to the new location with another finger.Slide with two fingersIn some apps, like Gallery, Messages, Mail,or the web browser, slide two fingersapart to zoom in when viewing a pictureor text.Slide two fingers together to zoom out of the picture ortext.23 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-23.png)
![Two-finger swipe§Swipe down from the status bar using two fingers to accessQuick settings.§In some apps that have sorting, like Mail or People, swipe up ordown using two fingers to scroll the screen. The screen displaysthe sorting order, and you can easily scroll to the informationyou want.Three-finger swipe§Swipe up using three fingers to open the Mediaoutput screen. Then choose where to share contentsuch as photos, videos, and music fromHTC One max.§Swipe down to disconnect from Media output.HTC gestures is enabled by default, which makes the three-finger gesture workonly when sharing content or using HTC apps.Three-finger tapWhile using the HTC Car app, tap the screen with three fingersto activate the voice command mode.24 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-24.png)
![Can't use multi-finger gestures in your apps?That's because HTC gestures is enabled by default. This makes the three-finger gesture exclusive for sharing content or for use with HTC apps. Youwon't be able to use multi-finger gestures (gestures that use three fingers ormore) for other purposes.To use multi-finger gestures in games or musical instrument apps, clear theHTC gestures option in Settings > Display, gestures & buttons (or Display &buttons).Motion gesturesUse motion gestures to mute HTC One max, lower the ringtone volume, and more.Flip to silenceWhen a call comes in you can turnHTC One max over to mute it.Pick up to lower volumeIn a business meeting or restaurant, pickHTC One max up when a call comes in tolower the ringtone volume.25 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-25.png)
![Set volume to automatically rise while in your pocket or bagOn a noisy street and can't hear HTC One max ringing inyour bag?You can set HTC One max to recognize when it's in yourbag or pocket and raise the ringtone volume so that youcan hear it in noisy environments.Rotate HTC One max for a better viewFor many screens, you canautomatically change the screenorientation from portrait tolandscape by turningHTC One max sideways.When entering text, you can turnHTC One max sideways to bringup a bigger keyboard.Sleep modeSleep mode saves battery power by putting HTC One max into a low power statewhile the display is off. It also stops accidental button presses when HTC One max isin your bag.Switching to Sleep modeBriefly press the POWER button to turn off the display and switch to Sleep mode.HTC One max also automatically goes into Sleep mode when it’s left idle for a while.You can change the time before HTC One max sleeps in the Display, gestures &buttons (or Display & buttons) settings.Waking up from Sleep modeTo wake HTC One max up manually, press the POWER button. If your screen isprotected with a lock screen, you need to unlock it.HTC One max automatically wakes up when you have an incoming call.26 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-26.png)
![Unlocking the screenDrag the lock icon or clock up. If you've set up a screen lock, you'll be asked to provide your credentials beforeHTC One max unlocks.If you've set an event reminder or an alarm, you can snooze or dismiss the event oralarm right from the lock screen. Just drag or up.Opening an app§Tap an app on the launch bar at the bottom of the Home screen.§To see the All Apps screen, tap . Then tap the app you want to use.§In the All Apps screen, pull down to show the hidden menu bar. Then tap and enter the name of the app you're looking for.Opening an app or folder from the lock screen§On the lock screen, drag an app or folder icon up to unlock the screen anddirectly go to the app or folder. The shortcuts on the lock screen are the same ones on your Home screen's launchbar. To change the lock screen shortcuts, replace the apps or folders on the launchbar.§When there's a notification or info shown on the lock screen such as a missedcall or new message, you can drag it up to directly go to its app.If you've set up a screen lock, you'll be asked to provide your credentials first beforeHTC One max opens the app or folder.27 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-27.png)
![Switching between recently opened appsWhen you're multitasking and using different apps on HTC One max, you can easilyswitch between the apps you've recently opened.Double-tap to see recently-opened apps. §To switch back to an app, just tap it.§To remove an app from the list, drag it up.Refreshing contentIn some apps, you can easily refresh content that's synced or downloaded from theWeb with a simple finger gesture.1. While viewing content such as weather, stocks, or Mail inbox, scroll to the top ofthe screen.2. Pull down with your finger, and then release to refresh.Using Quick SettingsTap the tiles in Quick Settings to easily turn on Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and more. You'll alsofind a few shortcuts, such as for viewing your profile in the People app.With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.You can also tap to switch to Quick Settings from the Notifications panel.28 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-28.png)
![Customizing Quick SettingsAside from the default tiles, there are several other tiles available in Quick Settings.1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. Tap and do one of the following:§In the Quick Settings list, press and hold next to the item you want tomove and drag it to rearrange the list.§Under Hidden items, press and hold and drag it up to make it availablein Quick Settings.There is a limit to the number of tiles that can be shown in Quick Settings. You mayneed to remove an existing item to make space for another one. To remove anitem, drag it below Hidden items.Miss having a Menu button?You can set the Home button to open the Menu.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Display, gestures & buttons (or Display &buttons).2. Tap Home and select how you want to open the Menu, which is to pressand hold the button.Capturing your phone's screenWant to show off your high game score or write a blog post about HTC One maxfeatures? It's easy to take a picture of the screen and share it from Gallery.Press and hold POWER and VOLUME DOWN at the same time. The image is saved in the Screenshots album in Gallery.You can also share the image when see in the status bar. Open theNotifications panel and tap under the screenshot notification. If you don't see, slide two fingers apart on the screenshot notification.NotificationsNotification LED29 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-29.png)
![The notification LED shows a:§Solid green light when HTC One max is connected to the power adapter or acomputer and the battery is fully charged.§Flashing green light when you have a pending notification.§Solid orange light when the battery is being charged.§Flashing orange light when the battery level reaches very low.30 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-30.png)
![Notifications panelNotification icons inform you of new messages, calendar events, alarms, and activitiesin progress such as files downloading.When you see notification icons, open the Notifications panel to check out details ofthe notifications that you've received.1. To open the Notifications panel, slide down from the top of the screen. If you have several notifications, scroll down the screen to see them all.To quickly access the Notifications panel from Quick settings, tap .2. On the Notifications panel:§You can expand certain notifications to see more information, such as emailpreviews and calendar events. Slide two fingers apart to expand anotification. To collapse it, slide two fingers together.§You'll see icons in some notifications that allow you to take immediateactions. For example, when you have a missed call, tap the available iconsto return the call or reply with a text message.§Tap the notification icon on the left to open the corresponding app.§To dismiss just one notification in the list, drag it left or right.3. To close the Notifications panel, slide up from the bottom bar of the panel orpress . You can also tap to dismiss all notifications and close the Notifications panel.31 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-31.png)
![Working with textSelecting, copying, and pasting textIn HTC apps such as Internet and Mail, you can select and copy text, and then paste orshare it.1. Press and hold on a word.2. Drag the start and end anchors to highlight the surrounding text you want toselect. You can use the magnifier to zoom in while selecting your text. To turn on themagnifier, go to Settings > Accessibility, and then select the Show magnifieroption. You'll see the magnifier when you press and hold one of the text selectionanchors.3. After you have selected the text you want to copy, tap Copy. The selected text is then copied to the clipboard.4. In a text entry field (for example while composing an email), press and hold atthe point where you want to paste the text.5. Tap Paste.To copy the address of a linked webpage in the Internet app, press and hold thelink, and then tap Copy link URL.Sharing text1. After you have selected the text you want to share, tap Share.2. Choose where to paste and share the selected text, such as in an email messageor social network status update.32 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-32.png)
![The HTC Sense keyboardTyping is fast and accurate with the HTC Sense™ keyboard.§Word prediction also saves typing time. As you type, you'll see wordsuggestions that you can choose from. You can even add words, phrases, andshortcuts to the word prediction dictionary. See Entering text with wordprediction on page 34.§You can type words by just speaking. See Entering text by speaking on page36.§Turn on the Trace keyboard so you can type words by just sliding your fingerfrom one letter to another. See Using the Trace keyboard on page 36.§Just swipe right to access the numeric and symbol keyboard. Or swipe left toswitch between languages.§The keys have secondary numbers, punctuation symbols, or other charactersthat you can insert without having to switch to the numeric and symbolkeyboard.For example, just press and hold a key on the first row to insert a number.§Choose from a wide selection of emoji.§Show or hide navigational arrow keys on the keyboard. If you enable the arrowkeys in Settings, they'll only appear on the portrait keyboard.Entering textThe onscreen keyboard becomes available when you tap a text field in an app. Enterletters and numbers, change the keyboard layout or language, and more.Tap the keys on the onscreen keyboard to enter letters and numbers, as well aspunctuation marks and symbols.§Tap to enter an uppercase letter. Tap twice to turn on caps lock.§Press and hold keys with gray characters at the top to enter numbers, symbols,or accented letters. Some keys have multiple characters or accents associatedwith them.§Swipe right to show number and symbol keys. To return to the main keyboard,swipe left.§Tap above the keyboard or press to close the onscreen keyboard.To open the keyboard settings, tap above the keyboard. Or go to Settings >Language & keyboard > HTC Sense Input.33 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-33.png)
![Selecting a keyboard layoutChoose a keyboard layout that suits your typing style.1. Tap above the keyboard.2. Tap Keyboard selection > Keyboard types.3. Select the keyboard layout that you want to use.Choosing and switching between keyboard languagesIf multiple keyboard languages are available on HTC One max, you can choose whichlanguages to enable in the onscreen keyboard.1. Tap above the keyboard.2. Tap Keyboard selection, and then choose the languages you want.To change the keyboard language, do any of the following:§Swipe left on the onscreen keyboard (not available if you're using tracekeyboard).§Tap the language key (for example, ) until you see the keyboard languageyou want to use.§Press and hold the language key, and then drag your finger to the keyboardlanguage you want to use.Entering text with word predictionEver started typing something you weren't sure how to spell? With word prediction,you'll see suggested words displayed just above the keyboard.Word prediction and next word prediction are enabled by default.To enter text in word prediction mode, do any of the following:§Tap the space bar to insert a highlighted word in the suggestion list.§Tap a word from the suggestion list.§Tap the arrow next to the suggestion list to see more choices.If you've accidentally chosen a wrong word from the suggestion list, you canalways go back and change it by tapping the word and selecting anothersuggestion.34 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-34.png)
![Setting a second language for word predictionYou can set the word prediction to be bilingual. As you type, you’ll get wordsuggestions in the languages that you’ve selected.Bilingual prediction is available only when you're using a Latin-based keyboard.1. Tap above the keyboard.2. Tap Keyboard selection > Bilingual prediction, and then choose the languageyou want.Adding words and phrases to the word prediction dictionaryAdd frequently-used names, acronyms, and even phrases to the word predictiondictionary to easily find them in the suggestion list.Type even faster when you create text shortcuts to words and phrases. Instead oftyping "Talk to you later", save a few keystrokes by adding the ttyl shortcut. Inyour message or email, just type "ttyl", and then tap the spacebar to enter thecomplete phrase.1. Tap above the keyboard.2. Tap Personal dictionary > .3. Enter a word or phrase, and then enter its text shortcut. Be sure to rememberthis shortcut, including the uppercase and lowercase letters you've typed.4. Tap OK.While you're entering text using the Standard keyboard layout, tapping asuggested word that’s not in the dictionary (usually the first word shown in thesuggestion list) automatically stores it.Editing or deleting words and phrases in the word prediction dictionary1. Tap above the keyboard.2. Tap Personal dictionary.§To edit a word, phrase, or shortcut, tap the item in the list.§To delete items from the dictionary, tap > Delete. Select the words youwant to remove, and then tap Delete.35 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-35.png)
![Using the Trace keyboardInstead of tapping the keys on the onscreen keyboard, you can "trace" to type words.You need to turn on the Trace keyboard in Settings > Language & keyboard > HTCSense Input.1. Slide your finger from one letter to the next to enter a word.2. Lift your finger when the word is completed.You can also do the following while using the Trace keyboard:§Tap the space bar to insert a highlighted word.§Tap a word from the suggestion list.§Tap the arrow next to the suggestion list to see more choices.Entering text by speakingNo time to type? Try speaking the words to enter them.1. Tap an area where you want to enter text.2. Tap above the keyboard.3. When you see the animated microphone button and the words "Speak now",say the words you want to enter. To set the voice input language, tap the language bar above the microphonebutton. You can choose one or more languages. Available languages may vary.4. If a word doesn't match what you've spoken and it's underlined, tap theunderlined word to delete it or to see more choices.5. Enter punctuation marks by saying the name (for example, say "comma").36 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-36.png)
![BatteryChecking battery usageSee a ranking list of apps that are using the battery. You can also see how much andhow long the battery has been used for each app.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Power.2. Tap Usage, and then tap an app to check how it's using the battery. You'll seehow much battery power is used by resources such as the CPU for the app andother use details.If you see buttons while viewing an app's battery use details, you can tap them toadjust settings that affect battery usage, stop the app, and more.Displaying the battery percentageYou can check the percentage of remaining battery power right from the status bar.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Power.2. Select Show battery level.Checking battery historyCheck how long you've been using HTC One max since the last charge. You can alsosee a chart that shows how long the screen has been on, and how long you've beenusing connections like the mobile network or Wi-Fi.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Power.2. Tap History.3. If you've used HTC One max for a long time since the last charge, swipe left orright to scale the graph that details battery usage over time. You can also slide two fingers together or apart to scale the graph.Getting the battery to last longerHow long the battery can last before it needs recharging depends on how you useHTC One max. HTC One max power management helps to increase battery life.In times when you need to extend the battery life more, try out some of these tips:Check your battery usageMonitoring your battery usage helps you identify what's using the most power so youcan choose what to do about it. For details, see Checking battery usage on page 37.37 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-37.png)
![Manage your connections§Turn off wireless connections you're not using.To turn on or off connections such as mobile data, Wi-Fi, or Bluetooth, go toSettings and tap their On/Off switches.§Turn GPS on only when a precise location is needed.To prevent some apps from using GPS in the background, keep the GPSsatellites setting off. Turn it on only when you need your precise location whileusing navigation or location-based apps. Go to Settings and tap Location toturn this setting on or off.§If the Sleep mode option in Settings > Power is enabled, at low peak times, yourphone will turn off the data connection after the screen has been off for 15minutes and there's no network activity (no downloads, streaming, or datausage). The data connection resumes when you switch the screen back on.§Turn on Airplane mode when you don't need any wireless connections and youdon't want to receive calls or messages.Manage your displayLowering the brightness, letting the display sleep when not in use, and keeping itsimple helps save battery power.§Use automatic brightness (the default), or manually lower the brightness.§Set the screen timeout to a shorter time.§Don't use a live wallpaper for your Home screen. Animation effects are nice toshow off to other people but they drain your battery.Changing your wallpaper to a plain, black background can also help a little. Theless color is displayed, the less battery is used.§Set the web browser to auto dim the screen while webpages load. Open theInternet app, and then tap > Settings > Accessibility > Dim screen duringpage loading.For more details, see Settings and security on page 143 and Personalizing on page47.Manage your apps§Install the latest software and application updates. Updates sometimes includebattery performance improvements.§Uninstall or disable apps that you never use.Many apps run processes or sync data in the background even when you're notusing them. If there are apps that you don't need anymore, uninstall them.If an app came preloaded and can't be uninstalled, disabling the app can stillprevent it from continuously running or syncing data. In Settings > Apps, swipeto the All tab, tap the app, and then tap Disable.38 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-38.png)
![Limit background data and syncBackground data and sync can use a lot of battery power if you have many appssyncing data in the background. It’s recommended not to let apps sync data toooften. Determine which apps can be set with longer sync times, or sync manually.§In Settings, tap Accounts & sync and check what types of data are being syncedin your online accounts. When the battery is starting to run low, temporarilydisable syncing some data.§If you have many email accounts, consider prolonging the sync time of someaccounts.In the Mail app, select an account, tap > Settings > Sync, Send & Receive, andthen adjust the settings under Sync schedule.§When you’re not traveling from one place to another, sync weather updates ofonly your current location, rather than in all of your named cities. Open theWeather app, and then tap > Edit to remove unneeded cities.§Choose widgets wisely.Some widgets constantly sync data. Consider removing the ones that are notimportant from your Home screen.§In Play Store, tap > Settings, and then clear Auto-add widgets to avoidautomatically adding Home screen widgets whenever you've installed new apps.Also tap Auto-update apps > Do not auto-update apps if you're fine withupdating apps from Play Store manually.Other tipsTo squeeze in a little bit more battery power, try these tips:§Tone down the ringtone and media volume.§Minimize the use of vibration or sound feedback. In Settings, tap Sound andchoose which ones you don't need and can disable.§Check your apps’ settings as you may find more options to optimize the battery.39 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-39.png)
![Using power saver modePower saver mode helps to increase battery life. It reduces the usage of phonefeatures that drain the battery such as the display and data connection.1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. Tap the Power saver tile to turn power saver mode on or off. If you want to choose which phone features to conserve power for, tap firstbefore you turn power saver mode on.If power saver mode's Data connection option is selected, HTC One maxautomatically disconnects from the mobile network after 15 minutes when thescreen is off and the data connection is idle (no download activity, streaming, ordata usage). It reconnects and then disconnects periodically when the dataconnection is idle to save battery power.Keep in mind though that the Sleep mode option for the data connection inSettings > Power, when enabled, overrides power saver mode.40 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-40.png)
![CameraCamera basicsTake great photos and videos with the camera, and make them more memorable byapplying a variety of effects and scenes.Open the Camera app to capture that perfect moment. While waiting to take yournext photo, switch HTC One max to Sleep mode. When you're ready to take morephotos and videos, just press POWER again to use the camera.Use the controls on the Viewfinder screen to add effects, set the flash, and more.Zooming§Before taking a photo or video, slide two fingers apart to zoom in or together tozoom out.§When you see the zoom bar, slide your finger on the zoom bar to zoom in orout.§When you're recording video, you can freely zoom in or out while recording.Switching between the front and main cameraOn the Viewfinder screen, do any of the following:§Pull from the top or bottom edge in landscape view.§Pull from the left or right edge in portrait view.§Tap and then tap the Front/Main switch.Some camera features are not available when you’re using the front camera, suchas zooming.41 CameraOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-41.png)
![Choosing an effectUse the available camera effects to make your photos look like they’ve been takenthrough special lenses or filters. You can also apply certain effects to videos.1. Tap .2. Scroll through the available effects and tap one that you like. Effects marked with can only be applied to photos.Setting the video resolution1. On the Viewfinder screen, tap .2. Under Settings, tap Video Quality, and then choose a video resolution.Choosing a flash modeTap the flash icon to choose a flash mode. When using Flash on or Auto flash mode, the camera intelligently sets the best flashbrightness for your photo.Taking a photo1. Open the Camera app.2. Just point the camera at what you want to capture. The camera adjusts thefocus automatically as you move it.3. When you're ready to take the photo, tap . You can also tap anywhere on the screen to take a photo if you turned on Touch tocapture in > Shutter option.Recording video1. Open the Camera app.2. When you're ready to start recording, tap .3. While recording, you can:§Freely zoom in or out.§Change focus to a different subject or area by just tapping it on theViewfinder screen.§Tap the flash icon to turn the flash on or off.4. To stop recording, tap .42 CameraOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-42.png)
![Taking a photo while recording a video (VideoPic)Make sure that you're in Normal scene to use this feature.While you're recording video using the main camera, tap to capture a still shot ofyour subject.Taking continuous camera shotsDo you want to take photos of moving subjects? Whether it’s your kid's football gameor a car race, you can capture the action.Make sure that you're in Normal scene to use this feature.1. On the Viewfinder screen, just press and hold . The camera takes up to 20consecutive shots of your subject.2. After taking the shots, do any of the following:§To keep just one photo, select the photo that you like the most, and thentap Best shot.§To save the photos as a batch, press .To get creative with your photos, open and edit them in the Gallery app. Additionalediting features are available for a batch of continuous shots, such as SequenceShot, Always Smile, and Object Removal.43 CameraOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-43.png)
![Camera scenesA scene is a collection of settings to suit the lighting and environment. Use Normaland let the camera automatically determine optimal settings, or choose from a wideselection of scenes before you start taking photos.Try the Anti-shake mode to help lessen shakes and blurs in your photos.Improving portrait shotsIf you'd like your family or friends to look their best in your photos, make sure to usethe portrait scene. It smoothens the skin in your shots.1. On the Viewfinder screen, tap .2. Under Photo capture mode, tap next to Scene, and then tap Portrait.3. When you're ready to take the photo, tap .Taking a self portraitNo one around to take your photo?1. Switch to the front camera by pulling the Viewfinder screen's top or bottomedge in landscape view. In portrait view, you can pull from the left or right edge to switch to the frontcamera.2. Tap anywhere on the screen to start the timer. The camera takes a photo afterthe countdown.Taking HTC Zoe photosDon’t let the best moments just pass by. When timing is everything, capture the exactmoment with HTC Zoe™ and get more than just a still photo.Some camera features are not available when you’re using HTC Zoe, such aszooming.1. On the Viewfinder screen, tap to switch HTC Zoe on.2. When you're ready to capture, tap . When you see the shutter release iconslowly turn red , continue holding the phone steady as the camera capturesa few seconds of shots.You'll find HTC Zoe photos in the Gallery app comprised of a video clip and a coverphoto.44 CameraOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-44.png)
![What is HTC Zoe?HTC Zoe captures a series of high quality photos and collects them in a short videoclip. Like the traditional "Zoetrope" that inspired it, HTC Zoe photos are in motionwhen you view them.But HTC Zoe is more than just a camera mode. With HTC Zoe, you can:§Get creative with advanced editing features in Gallery such as Sequence Shot,Always Smile, and Object Removal.§Extract and save a specific image from your HTC Zoe shot while viewing it inGallery.§Share HTC Zoe shots to your social networks using HTC Share.Taking a panoramic photoGet a wider shot of natural or urban landscapes in one sweep.Some camera features are not available when you’re in this mode, such as zooming.1. On the Viewfinder screen, tap .2. Under Photo capture mode, tap Sweep panorama.3. When you're ready to take the shot, tap . Directional arrows appear,prompting you to pan left or right in either landscape or portrait view.4. Pan HTC One max as smoothly as you can to automatically capture frames. You can also tap to stop capturing anytime.The camera stitches the frames into a single photo.Using HDRWhen shooting portraits against a bright background, use the HDR (High DynamicRange) scene to capture your subjects clearly. HDR brings out the details of both thehighlights and shadows, even in high contrast lighting.1. On the Viewfinder screen, tap .2. To take an HDR photo, under Photo capture mode, tap HDR, and then tap . HDR works best when your subject is steady. The camera takes multiple shots atdifferent exposure levels and combines them into one enhanced photo.3. To capture an HDR video, under Video capture mode, tap Scene > Video HDR(Full HD), and then tap .45 CameraOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-45.png)
![Recording videos in slow motionRelive high speed action bit by bit and add a touch of suspense to your videos.Audio is not captured when you're in this mode.1. On the Viewfinder screen, tap .2. Under Video capture mode, tap Scene > Slow motion video.3. Frame your subject on the Viewfinder screen.4. Tap to start recording.5. To stop recording, tap .After recording your slow motion video, you can change the playback speed ofselected sections when you edit the video in Gallery.46 CameraOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-46.png)
![PersonalizingMaking HTC One max truly yoursMake HTC One max look and sound just the way you want it. Personalize it with adifferent wallpaper and ringtone, and you can also choose notification sounds forevents such as incoming text, email, and calendar reminders.Changing your wallpaperPick your favorite photo as your Home wallpaper. Choose from the availablewallpapers, or use any photo you've taken with the camera.You can also use the HTC Get Started service to choose a photo from your computeras your wallpaper.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Personalize.2. Tap Wallpaper.3. Tap one of the following:HTC wallpapers Choose a preset wallpaper, and then tap Preview.Live wallpapers Choose a preset animated wallpaper, and then tap Preview.If the animated wallpaper you chose can be customized, tapSettings.ComputerphotosUse the HTC Get Started service to choose a photo fromyour computer and use it as a wallpaper on HTC One max.Gallery Choose an existing photo and crop it.4. Tap Done or Apply.47 PersonalizingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-47.png)
![Personalizing the launch barThe launch bar gives you one-touch access to commonly used apps. You can replacethe apps on the launch bar with other apps you often use.1. Press and hold the app you want to replace, and then drag it out to . 2. Press and hold an app, and then drag it to the empty slot on the launch bar.§You can also group apps on the launch bar into a folder.§The apps or shortcuts you see on the lock screen are the same as the ones on thelaunch bar.Adding a widget to your Home screenWidgets make at-a-glance important information and media content easily available.Choose from a selection of widgets and add the most useful ones to your Homescreen.1. On the Feeds panel or any widget panel, slide two fingers together to customizethe Home screen.2. Tap > Widgets. You can:§Swipe to browse through the widgets.§Tap to search for specific widgets.Some widgets are available in different styles and sizes.3. Press and hold and then drag a widget to a home screen thumbnail where youwant to add it.You can also add widgets that allow you to quickly switch on or off certain settingssuch as Wi-Fi and Bluetooth.48 PersonalizingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-48.png)
![Changing the settings of a widgetYou can modify basic settings of some widgets (for example, the People widget) fromthe Home screen.1. Press and hold a widget on your Home screen, and then drag it to . The relevant screen where you can change some settings for this widget thenopens.2. Customize the widget settings.Resizing a widgetSome widgets can be resized after you've added them to your Home screen.1. Press and hold a widget on the Home screen, and then release your finger. If aborder appears, that means the widget is resizable.2. Drag the sides of the border to enlarge or shrink the widget size.Adding apps and other shortcuts on yourHome screenPlace apps you often use on any widget panel of your Home screen. You can also addshortcuts to frequently used settings, bookmarked webpages, and more.1. On the Feeds panel or any widget panel, slide two fingers together to customizethe Home screen.2. Tap > Apps or Shortcuts. You can:§Swipe to browse through the apps or shortcuts.§Tap to search for specific apps or shortcuts.3. Press and hold and then drag an app or a shortcut to a home screen thumbnailwhere you want to add it.To add an app from the All Apps screen, press and hold an app and drag it to .Drop the app on an empty space on the Home screen.49 PersonalizingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-49.png)
![Rearranging or removing widgets and icons onyour Home screenMoving a widget or iconYou can easily move a widget or icon from one widget panel to another.1. Press and hold the widget or icon with one finger.2. With another finger, flick left or right to rotate the screen to another widgetpanel. 3. Release the widget or icon.4. To move the widget or icon to another position on the panel, just press and holdand then drag it.Removing a widget or icon1. Press and hold the widget or icon you want to remove, and then drag it to .2. When the widget or icon turns red, lift your finger.Arranging apps on the All Apps screenPersonalize the All Apps screen to your liking. You can rearrange the apps and changethe layout.1. From the Feeds panel or any widget panel, tap .2. Pull down and hold the screen until you see an icon bar. 50 PersonalizingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-50.png)
![3. Tap > Grid size to choose whether to display more or fewer apps per page.4. If you're not in Custom view, tap > Custom.5. To move an app, press and hold the app, and then do one of the following:§Drag the app to another position on the same page. Wait until you see theoccupying icon move away before releasing your finger.§Drag the app to the or arrow to move it to another page.You can also group apps into folders and hide or unhide apps.Grouping apps into a folderYou can combine apps into folders on the All Apps screen, launch bar, or on thewidget panels of your Home screen.To group apps on the All Apps screen, you need to be in Custom view.1. Press and hold an app, and then drag it over to another app to automaticallycreate a folder. 2. To add more apps into the folder, do the following:§On the All Apps screen, drag each app over to the folder.§On the launch bar or widget panel, first tap the folder to open it. Tap ,select apps that you want to add, and then tap Done.You can also add shortcuts to settings or information to a folder that's on thelaunch bar or widget panel. Add a shortcut first to a widget panel, and then drag itover to the folder.Renaming a folder1. Tap the folder to open it.2. Tap the folder window’s title bar.3. Enter a new folder name.4. Tap outside the folder to close it.51 PersonalizingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-51.png)
![Removing items from a folder1. Tap the folder to open it.2. Do one of the following:§From a folder on the All Apps screen, press and hold an app, and then dragit out of the folder.§From a folder on the launch bar or widget panel, press and hold an app,and then drag it out to .If there's only one item left in the folder, the folder ungroups the last item andremoves itself automatically.Hiding or unhiding appsOn the All Apps screen, you can hide apps that you don't use. You can easily unhidethem later when you need them.1. On the All Apps screen, pull down and hold the screen until you see an icon bar. 2. Tap > Hide/Unhide apps.3. Select the apps you want to hide, or clear their check boxes to unhide them.4. Tap Done.Adding, removing, or arranging widget panels§You won't be able to add a new widget panel if you've already reached themaximum limit.§If the Feeds panel is not hidden, it always appears as the first panel. A widgetpanel cannot be inserted before the Feeds panel.1. On the Feeds panel or any widget panel, slide two fingers together to customizethe Home screen.2. To add a new widget panel, swipe left across the Home screen thumbnails untilyou reach the last thumbnail, and then tap .3. To remove a widget panel, press and hold its thumbnail, and then drag it to .4. To move a widget panel, press and hold its thumbnail, and then drag it left orright to the position that you want.52 PersonalizingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-52.png)
![Changing your main Home screenBy default, the Feeds panel is the main Home screen. Instead of jumping to the Feedspanel when pressing the HOME button, you can go directly to a widget panel.1. On the Feeds panel or any widget panel, slide two fingers together to customizethe Home screen.2. Tap a widget panel that you want to be your main Home screen.3. Tap Set as home.Pressing from an app will first return you to the last panel you were in. Justpress again to go to your main Home screen.Changing the sounds for your ringtone,notifications, and alarm1. Go to Settings, and then tap Personalize.2. Under Sound, choose different sounds for your ringtone, system notification,and alarm. Go to the Messages, Mail, Calendar, and Tasks apps to choose sounds for newmessages, email, calendar, and task reminders respectively.Want alarms to ring louder but notifications to be more discreet? In Settings, tapSound > Volumes and set the volume levels for each sound type.Rearranging application tabsYou can add to or rearrange the tabs in some apps to make it easy to get to the mostimportant information.1. Open an app that has tabs.2. Press and hold a tab until a screen for rearranging tabs appears.3. You can:§Select the tabs you want to add.§Change the order of the tabs. Press and hold next to a tab, and thendrag to the new position.4. Tap Done.53 PersonalizingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-53.png)
![Phone callsMaking a call with Smart dialYou can either dial a number directly, or use Smart dial to quickly place a call. Smartdial searches and calls a stored/synced contact or a number from your call history.HTC One max is available in either a 3G or LTE version, depending on your regionand mobile operator. You need an LTE plan to use your operator's 4G/LTE networkfor voice calls and data services. Check with your operator for details.1. Open the Phone app.2. Enter the phone number or first few letters of the contact’s name to see the topmatching contact. If there is more than one match, you'll be told how many matches. For example, tap"8 MATCHES" to see all 8 matches.3. Tap the contact you want to call. §To check other phone numbers associated with the contact, tap beside thecontact name.§If the phone number has an extension, tap after connecting to the main line andthen dial the extension number.4. To hang up, tap End Call.Changing the Phone dialer layoutSwitch between the Smart dial keypad to find contacts with just a few taps and a fullscreen keypad that gives you more room to enter phone numbers.1. Open the Phone app.2. Tap > Full screen keypad or Smart dial keypad.54 Phone callsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-54.png)
![Dialing an extension numberTo skip voice prompts when dialing an extension number, do one of the following:§After dialing the main number, press and hold * . The letter p is added to thenumber you are dialing. Enter the extension number, and then tap Call. You willbe connected to the mainline and then to the extension number.§After dialing the main number, press and hold #. The letter w is added to thenumber you are dialing. Enter the extension number, and then tap Call. Afterconnecting to the main line, tap Send to dial the extension number.You can save phone numbers with an extension in the People app.Returning a missed callYou'll see the missed call icon in the status bar when you miss a call.1. Slide the Notifications panel open to check who the caller is.2. To return the call, spread your two fingers on the missed call notification toexpand it, and then tap Call back.If you have multiple missed calls, tap the missed calls notification to open the CallHistory tab.Using Speed dialUse Speed dial to call a phone number with a single tap. For example, if you assign acontact’s number to the number 2 key, you can just press and hold 2 to dial thenumber.The number 1 key is generally reserved for your voicemail. Press and hold this keyto call voicemail and retrieve your voicemail messages.Assigning a speed dial key1. Open the Phone app.2. Tap > Speed dial > . You can also press and hold an unassigned key on the dialpad, and then tap Yes.3. Select a contact from the list.4. On the Speed dial screen, choose the phone number of the contact to use, and aspeed dial key to assign.5. Tap Save.55 Phone callsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-55.png)
![Calling a phone number in a text message1. Tap the phone number within the message.2. Tap Call. To call the message sender, tap the received message, and then tap Call on theoptions menu.Calling a phone number in an email1. Tap the phone number in the email body.2. Tap Call.Calling a phone number in a Calendar event1. Open an event in Calendar.2. On the Event details screen, tap the phone number.3. Tap Call.Making an emergency callIn some regions, you can make emergency calls from HTC One max even if you don’thave a micro SIM card installed or your micro SIM card has been blocked.If you don't have a network signal, you won't be able to make an emergency call.1. Open the Phone app.2. Dial the emergency number for your locale, and then tap Call.If you've enabled but forgotten your lock password or lock pattern, you can stillmake emergency calls by tapping Emergency call on the screen.56 Phone callsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-56.png)
![Receiving callsWhen you receive a phone call from a contact, the Incoming call screen appears.HTC One max will automatically adjust the ringtone volume when you use thepolite ringer and pocket mode features.Answering or rejecting a callDo one of the following:§If the display is on when you get a call, tap Answer or Decline.§If the display is locked when you get a call, drag or upwards.After declining a call, you can send a text message to the caller or create a task toremind you to return the call.You can also press the POWER button twice to reject a call.Muting the ringing sound without rejecting the callDo one of the following:§Press the VOLUME DOWN or VOLUME UP button.§Press the POWER button.§Place HTC One max face down on a level surface.If HTC One max is already facing down, it will still ring when there are subsequentincoming calls.Look who's callingEvery time you make a call or your friend gives you a ring, you get to see your friend’slatest social network status update right on the call screen. You’ll also see a birthdayreminder if your friend’s birthday (stored on your phone or online account) willhappen in a few days.Viewing a task reminder while on a callDid you promise to babysit for a friend this weekend? If you associate a task with adue date to a contact, you'll see a task reminder on the call screen when you're on acall with that friend.If the contact has a recent status update, you won't be able to see the taskreminder.57 Phone callsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-57.png)
![What can I do during a call?When a call is in progress, you can turn the speakerphone on, place the call on hold,and more.Putting a call on holdTo put the call on hold, tap . The status bar then displays the hold call icon .To resume the call, tap .Switching between callsIf you’re already in a call and you accept another call, you can switch between the twocalls.1. When you receive another call, tap Answer to accept the second call and putthe first call on hold.2. To switch between the calls, tap the person you want to talk to on the screen.Turning the speakerphone on or off during a callTo decrease potential damage to your hearing, do not hold HTC One max to yourear when the speakerphone is on.§On the call screen, tap . The speakerphone icon appears in the status bar.§To turn the speakerphone off, tap .Muting the microphone during a callOn the call screen, tap to toggle between turning the microphone on or off. Whenthe microphone is turned off, the mute icon appears in the status bar.Ending a callDo one of the following to end the call:§On the call screen, tap End Call.§Slide the Notifications panel open, then tap .If the phone number of the person who called is not in your contacts list, you canchoose to save the number to your contacts list after you hang up.58 Phone callsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-58.png)
![Setting up a conference callConference calling with your friends, family, or co-workers is easy. Make the first call(or accept a call), and then simply dial each subsequent call to add it to theconference.Make sure your micro SIM card is enabled with conference calling service. Contactyour mobile operator for details.1. Make a call to the first conference call participant.2. When connected, tap > Add call, and then dial the number of the secondparticipant. The first participant is put on hold.3. When connected to the second participant, tap .4. To add another participant, tap , and then dial the number of the contact.5. When connected, tap to add the participant to the conference call.6. To talk to a person in the conference call in private, tap and then selectPrivate call.To end the call with a participant, tap and then tap Finish this call.To end the conference call, tap End Call.Checking calls in the Call HistoryUse Call History to check missed calls, your dialed numbers, and received calls.1. Open the Phone app.2. Swipe to view the Call History tab.3. Do one of the following:§Tap a name or number in the list to call.§Press and hold a name or number in the list to display the options menu.§Tap to display just a particular type of call such as missed calls oroutgoing calls.Adding a new phone number to your contacts from Call History1. On the Call History tab, tap .2. Choose whether to create a new contact or save the number to an existingcontact.59 Phone callsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-59.png)
![Clearing the Call History listOn the Call History tab, do one of the following:Remove one name ornumberPress and hold the name or number, and then tap Deletefrom call history.Clear the entire list Tap > Remove call history. On the Delete from call historyscreen, tap > Select all, and then tap Delete.Blocking a callerWhen you block a phone number or a contact, all calls from the phone number orcontact will be declined automatically.On the Call History tab, press and hold the contact or phone number you want toblock, and then tap Block contact.You can always remove a caller from your blocked list. On the Call History tab, tap > Blocked contacts. Press and hold a contact, and then tap Unblock contacts.Changing ringtone settingsSwitching between silent, vibrate, and normal modesDo one of the following:§To change from silent to normal mode, press the VOLUME UP button.§To change from vibrate to normal mode, press the VOLUME UP button twice.§Go to Settings, and then tap Sound > Sound profile.Lowering the ring volume automaticallyHTC One max has a quiet ring feature that automatically lowers the ring volume whenyou move it.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Sound.2. Select the Quiet ring on pickup option.Making HTC One max ring louder in your pocket or bagTo help avoid missing incoming calls when HTC One max is in your pocket or bag, thepocket mode feature gradually increases the ring volume and vibrates when youreceive a call.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Sound.2. Select the Pocket mode option.60 Phone callsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-60.png)
![Home dialingWhen you're on a trip abroad, it's easy to dial friends and family from home.Your home country code is automatically added when you call your contacts whileroaming. But when manually entering a phone number to call, you need to enter a plus(+) sign and country code before the number.Using a roaming service may incur additional charges. Check with your mobileoperator for rates before using a roaming service.Changing the default country code for Home dialing1. Go to Settings, and then tap Call.2. Tap Home dialing settings.3. Select a country, and then tap OK.Turning off Home dialingIf you prefer to manually enter complete phone numbers to call while roaming, youcan turn off Home dialing.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Call.2. Under Other settings, clear the Home dialing option.61 Phone callsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-61.png)
![MessagesSending a text message (SMS)1. Open the Messages app.2. Tap .3. Enter a contact name or mobile number in the To field.4. Tap the box that says Add text, and then enter your message. 5. Tap , or press to save the message as a draft. §There is a limit on the number of characters for a single text message (displayedabove ). If you exceed the limit, your text message will be delivered as one butwill be billed as more than one message.§Your text message automatically becomes a multimedia message if you enter anemail address as the recipient, add a message subject, attach an item, or composea very long message.Sending a multimedia message (MMS)1. Open the Messages app.2. Tap .3. Enter a contact name, mobile number, or email address in the To field.4. To add a subject line, tap > Add subject.5. Tap the box that says Add text, and then enter your message.62 MessagesOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-62.png)
![6. Tap , and then choose an attachment type. Record videos with minimum resolution so you can reduce the file size of yourattachments. In Camera settings, tap Video Quality > MMS.7. Select or browse for the item to attach.8. After adding an attachment, tap to see options for replacing, viewing orremoving your attachment.9. Tap , or press to save the message as a draft.Depending on the resolution of your photo or video attachments, they may bedisplayed as cropped thumbnails in your multimedia message.Creating a slideshow1. After you've added either a photo, video, or audio in the multimedia messageyou’re composing, tap > Slide.2. Choose where you want to insert the next slide.3. Right after adding a slide, do one of the following:§Tap , and then choose to add a photo or a video.§Tap > Audio to add music or a voice recording to a slide.§Tap Add text, and then enter your caption.§Tap to see options for replacing, viewing, or removing yourattachment.4. Tap > Preview. Tap once on the preview screen to see playback controls.5. When finished, tap , or press to save the message as a draft.Can't find your contacts' email addresses in Messages?1. If only phone numbers are showing up when you're entering a contactname, tap .2. Tap > Show Email.To always show email addresses, in Message settings, tap General > Showemail address.63 MessagesOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-63.png)
![Sending a group messageGroup messaging makes it easy to send a message to multiple contacts all at once.You can choose to send a group SMS or group MMS.Group MMS may incur extra data fees.1. Open the Messages app.2. Tap .3. Tap , and then select multiple recipients.4. To send a group SMS, make sure that Send as individual messages is selected.Clear this option to send your message as a group MMS.GroupSMSYour message will be sent to the recipients as a text message andyou will be charged by your mobile operator for each message sent.Replies of your recipients are sorted separately.GroupMMSSimilar to a group chat, sending a group MMS lets your recipientsjoin the conversation you've started.HTC One max also organizes message replies in a singleconversation thread. If this is your first time to send a group MMS,you may need to enter your mobile phone number.5. Tap the box that says Add text, then enter your message.6. Tap .Top questions on group MMSWhy can't my recipients see or join the group MMS I sent tothem?Check whether your recipients have enabled Group messaging on their mobiledevices. Some devices or mobile operators may not support this feature.How do I receive or block group MMS?In Message settings, tap Multimedia messages (MMS), and then turn GroupMessaging on or off.64 MessagesOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-64.png)
![Resuming a draft messageOpen a draft message right from the Messages screen, edit the message, and then tap.To see all draft messages in one place, tap on the Messages screen, and then tapDrafts.Replying to a message1. On the Messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display theexchange of messages with that contact.2. Tap the box that says Add text, and then enter your message.3. Tap .Replying to a contact's other phone numberWhen a contact has multiple phone numbers stored on HTC One max, you can selectwhich phone number to reply to.Keep in mind that your response will be sent to the phone number of the latestmessage you’ve received from this contact.1. On the Messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display theexchange of messages with that contact.2. Tap > Open contact. If you have recently received or sent a message to the contact, tap and selectwhich phone number you want to reply to.3. On the Details tab, tap next to the phone number you want to reply to.65 MessagesOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-65.png)
![4. Tap the box that says Add text, then enter your reply message.5. Tap .Why am I not receiving text messages from contacts who useiPhone?If you have just migrated your contacts from iPhone to HTC One max, yourcontacts may still be texting you through iMessage® and not through SMS orMMS.To receive text messages from your contacts who are using iPhone, you mustunregister the phone number you used on your old iPhone from your Applesupport profile.Or, if you still have your old iPhone, turn off the service in iMessage settings.Saving a text message in the Tasks appSave a text message in your Tasks list so you can remind yourself when to reply.1. On the Messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display theexchange of messages with that contact.2. Tap the message you want to save, and then tap Save as task.3. Enter other details or change the task title.4. Tap Save.Forwarding a message1. On the Messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to view the exchangeof messages with that contact.2. Tap a message, and then tap Forward.3. In the To field, fill in one or more recipients.4. Tap .66 MessagesOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-66.png)
![Viewing and saving an attachment from amultimedia message§If there’s a media attachment such as a photo or video in a received message,tap it to view the content.§To save the attachment, tap the multimedia message, and then choose to savefrom the options menu.§If the attachment is a contact (vCard), tap it and choose where to save it, andthen tap Save to add to your contacts.§If the attachment is an appointment or event (vCalendar), tap it to view theevent details, then tap Save and choose the calendar where to save it.If you are concerned about the size of your data downloads, you can choose tocheck the size and subject first before you download a multimedia message. On theMessages screen, tap > Settings > Multimedia messages (MMS). Clear the Auto-retrieve option.Moving messages to the secure boxYou can move private messages to the secure box. You will need to enter a passwordto read these messages.§The secure box does not encrypt messages.§Messages stored on your mico SIM card cannot be moved to the secure box.1. On the Messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display theexchange of messages with that contact.2. Tap > Move to secure box.3. Select the messages, and then tap Move.To move all the messages from a contact, on the Messages screen, press and holdthe contact and tap Move to secure box.§To read messages in the secure box, on the Messages screen, tap > Secure. Ifit is your first time to use the secure box, set a password.§To remove messages or contacts from the secure box, press and hold thecontact (or phone number) and tap Move to general box.67 MessagesOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-67.png)
![Blocking unwanted messagesDeclutter your Messages screen by moving spam messages from contacts to theblock box. If you have blocked a contact, that contact's text or picture messages willalso be in the block box.§On the Messages screen, press and hold a contact (or phone number) and tapBlock contact.§To block multiple contacts, tap > Block contacts, select the contacts, and tapMove.When the contact sends you messages, you will not see them in the Messages screenor receive notifications and calls.To read messages in the block box, on the Messages screen, tap > Block.§To remove messages or contacts from the block box, press and hold the contact(or phone number) and tap Unblock.§To completely discard future messages from blocked contacts, clear the Saveblock message option in the Messages settings.WAP push messagesWAP push messages contain a web link. Often, the link will be to download a file thatyou have requested from a service provider. Open only links from sources that youtrust.When you receive a WAP push message, a notification icon is displayed in thestatus bar.Opening and reading a new WAP push message1. Open the Notifications panel, and then tap the push message notification.2. Tap Visit website.Viewing all your WAP push messages1. Open the Messages app.2. Tap > Push messages. You can only see this option if you've previously received WAP push messages.68 MessagesOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-68.png)
![Copying a text message to your micro SIMcard1. On the Messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display theexchange of messages with that contact.2. Tap the message, and then tap Copy to SIM. A SIM card icon is displayed.Deleting messages and conversationsOn the Messages screen, do any of the following:Delete amessageOpen the conversation thread with a contact, tap the message,and then tap Delete message.To delete multiple messages within a conversation, tap > Deletemessages > Delete by selection, and then select the messages todelete.Delete aconversationPress and hold a contact (or phone number), and then tap Delete.To delete multiple conversations, on the Messages screen, tap >Delete threads, and then select the conversations to delete.In the Messages settings, tap General > Delete old messages to auto delete oldmessages.How do I protect a message from being deleted?You can lock a message so that it will not be deleted even if you delete theother messages in the conversation.1. On the Messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display theexchange of messages with that contact.2. Tap the message that you want to lock.3. Tap Lock message on the options menu. A lock icon is displayed.69 MessagesOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-69.png)
![Search and web browserSearching HTC One max and the WebYou can search for information on HTC One max and on the Web. Start your searchby entering a keyword or by using Google Voice Search™.Some apps, such as People or Mail, have their own search function, which you canuse to search only within those apps.Performing searches on the Web and HTC One max1. Open the Google app. Or swipe up from the button. If you've already set up a Google account on HTC One max, you will be given theoption to sign in to Google Now™. See Getting instant information with Google Nowon page 71.2. In the search box, enter what you want to search for. As you type, matchingitems on HTC One max and suggestions from Google web search are shown.To search for the information exclusively on HTC One max, swipe your finger up thescreen, and then tap Search phone.3. If what you’re searching for is in the list of suggestions, tap the item to open it inits compatible app.Searching the Web with your voiceUse Google Voice Search to find information on the Web by speaking toHTC One max.1. Open the Google app. Or swipe up from the button.2. Tap , and then say what you want to search for. After speaking, matchingitems from Google web search are shown.3. If what you’re searching for is in the list, tap the item to open it in its compatibleapp. Otherwise, tap to search again.70 Search and web browserOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-70.png)
![Setting search options1. Open the Google app. Or swipe up from the button.2. Do one of the following:§Press to hide the onscreen keyboard.§Scroll to the bottom.3. Tap > Settings to set the following options:§Voice. Set the Google Voice Search language, speech output, and more.§Phone search. Select which apps on HTC One max are included when doinga search.§Privacy & accounts. Manage your location history, enable recent websearches to show, or clear your search history.You can also access the settings when viewing the search results. Pull down thescreen to show the hidden menu button, and then tap > Settings.Getting instant information with Google NowDo you want to know the weather or your morning commute time before you startyour day? Google Now delivers quick and up-to-date information that matters to you—all without the search.Depending on your location, time of day, and previous Google searches, Google Nowdisplays information cards that include:§The day's weather and the weather forecast for upcoming days.§The traffic conditions on your way to work or your commute back home.§The directions and travel time to your next appointment.§The next train or bus arriving at your platform or bus stop.§Your favorite team's score and stats while you enjoy the game.Setting up Google NowBefore setting up Google Now:§Make sure that you're signed in to your Google account.§Turn location services on and make sure that you have an Internet connection.1. Open the Google app. Or swipe up from the button.2. The subsequent screens show examples of Google Now information cards. TapNext until you reach the Get Google Now! screen.71 Search and web browserOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-71.png)
![3. Tap Yes, I'm in. Google Now information cards will start to appear on theGoogle search screen.4. To see all available information cards, tap Show more cards.More information cards will appear on the Google search screen as you useHTC One max to search the Web, create appointments, and more.Changing card settingsYou can easily customize the settings of Google Now cards to suit your informationneeds. For example, you can change the weather units in the Weather card or yourtransportation mode in the Traffic card. You can also specify the details on certaincards or keep a card from appearing on the Google search screen.1. Open the Google app. Or swipe up from the button.2. Tap on the card you want to change, and then tap a setting at the bottom ofthe card. For certain cards that need specific details, such as your work address or sportsteams and stocks you follow, scroll to the bottom of the screen, and then tap >Settings > My stuff.Dismissing and hiding cards1. Open the Google app. Or swipe up from the button.2. Do any of the following:§To dismiss a card, swipe it left or right.§To keep the card from appearing on the Google search screen, scroll to thebottom of the screen and then tap > Settings > Google Now. Tap theOn/Off switch next to the card you want to hide.Refreshing Google NowRefresh Google Now to update the information cards or show relevant cards forinformation that you've just added on HTC One max, like an upcoming event inCalendar.1. Open the Google app. Or swipe up from the button.2. Scroll to the bottom of the screen, and then tap > Refresh.Turning off Google Now1. Open the Google app. Or swipe up from the button.2. Scroll to the bottom of the screen, and then tap > Settings.3. Tap the On/Off switch next to Google Now, and then tap Turn off.72 Search and web browserOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-72.png)
![Browsing the Web1. Open the Internet app.2. Tap the URL box on top of the screen. If the webpage is in fullscreen mode, flick the screen down to show the URL boxand other options.3. Enter the webpage address or your search keywords.4. On the webpage, you can:§Tap a link to open it, or press and hold a link to see more options.§Tap an email address to send a message to the email address, save it toPeople, and more.§Press and hold an image to save, copy, or set it as your wallpaper.5. To return to the previous webpage you've viewed, tap , and then tap or .Maximizing your browsing space§To hide the status bar when browsing, tap > Settings > General, and thenselect Fullscreen.§While browsing a webpage, tap > Desktop View to display the full desktopversion of the webpage.73 Search and web browserOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-73.png)
![Using browser tabsOpen multiple browser tabs and quickly switch from one webpage to another.Open the Internet app.§To add a browser tab, tap > . Repeat the same to open new browser tabs.§To switch among browser tabs, tap and swipe to the webpage you want toview. Tap the browser tab to display the webpage in full screen.§To close a browser tab, tap , and then tap .Saving web content for laterSave webpages to read later, even without an Internet connection. You can also addsome video clips on webpages to the Watch list so you can quickly find and watchthem whenever you like.HTC One max saves webpage text and images only. You will need Internetconnection to open linked pages and play video clips.1. While viewing a webpage, tap > .2. Tap Reading list or Watch list. When the webpage you're adding to the Watch list has one or more video clips,you'll be asked to choose which videos you want to add.To view a saved webpage or video clip, tap > Saved. Swipe to the Reading list orWatch list, and then tap a webpage or video you want to view.74 Search and web browserOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-74.png)
![Setting browser optionsCustomize the web browser to suit your browsing style. Set display, privacy, andsecurity options when using the web browser.From the browser screen, tap > Settings.Bookmarking a webpageAdd your favorite webpages as bookmarks so you can access them quickly.Bookmark a webpage in a normal browser screen and not when you're browsingincognito.1. While viewing a webpage, tap > > Bookmarks.2. On the Bookmark this page screen, you can edit the bookmark name, sync thebookmark with an online account, or save the bookmark in a new categoryfolder.3. Tap Done.To view and open a bookmark, tap > Bookmarks. Navigate to the bookmark youwant to open, and then tap it.You can also add a bookmark directly to the Home screen. While viewing awebpage, tap > > Home screen.75 Search and web browserOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-75.png)
![Not seeing your bookmark?On the Bookmarks screen, tap and select All bookmarks. HTC One max willdisplay all your bookmarks, including those which are synced with an onlineaccount.Syncing your bookmarks with Google ChromeCreate bookmarks from your computer's Google Chrome™ browser and sync them onHTC One max. For more information about Google Chrome, visit http://support.google.com/chrome.§Using your Google Chrome desktop browser, you need to sign in to your GoogleAccount and set up Google Chrome sync.§Be sure that you are logged in to your Google Account every time you saveGoogle Chrome bookmarks on your computer.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Accounts & sync.2. Tap Google.3. Tap your Google Account.4. Select the Internet option.Using your browsing historyHTC One max keeps a record of webpages you've visited.If you don't want HTC One max to keep your browsing history, browse using anincognito tab. See Private browsing on page 77.1. While viewing a webpage, tap > History.2. Swipe to the History or Most visited tab.3. Navigate to the webpage that you want to view, and then tap it.76 Search and web browserOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-76.png)
![Clearing your browsing history1. While viewing a webpage, tap > Settings > Privacy & security > Clear history.2. Tap OK.All webpage entries in the History and Most visited tabs are deleted.If you want to delete a single webpage entry, go to the History or Most visited tab,press and hold the webpage entry, and then tap Remove from history or Removefrom most visited.Private browsingYou can use incognito tabs to browse the Web with more privacy. Browser cookiesare deleted and not shared when you close all incognito tabs. Pages you view inincognito also won't appear in your browser history (except for files you'vedownloaded).From the browser screen, tap > .77 Search and web browserOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-77.png)
![EntertainmentMusicListening to musicEnjoy your favorite songs on HTC One max using the Music app.When you open the Music app for the first time, you'll be asked if you would like toautomatically download related content, such as album covers and artist photos, toHTC One max.1. Open the Music app.2. Swipe to the different tabs to browse by category.3. Tap a song to play.4. Tap the onscreen icons to control music playback, repeat songs, and more.Press and drag your finger across theprogress bar to jump to any part of the song.Turn shuffle on or off. (Shuffle is off whenbutton is gray.)Cycle through the repeat modes: repeat allsongs, repeat current song, and don’t repeat.Play your music on a DLNA® compliant TV oraudio system, HTC Media Link HD, or stereoBluetooth device.Minimize the Now playing screen to continuebrowsing your music collection.When you're listening to music and the screen display turns off, press POWER toturn the screen back on and control the music playback directly on the Lockscreen.78 EntertainmentOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-78.png)
![Creating and working with playlistsPersonalize your music experience by creating music playlists. Make a playlistcontaining just your favorite songs or create one to match your mood for the day.You can make as many playlists as you like.1. Open the Music app.2. Swipe to the Playlists tab.3. Tap , and then enter a playlist name.4. To add songs, tap beside the title text box, browse your music collection,and then tap a song to add. Repeat this step to add more songs.5. You can also:Rearrange songs Press and hold next to the song title you want tomove, and then drag it to its new position.Delete songs Select the songs you want to remove from the playlist.Change playlistnameType the new name of the playlist in the title text box.6. Tap Save.To edit a playlist you've created, swipe to the Playlists tab on the Music app's mainscreen. Tap a playlist to open it, and then tap > Edit playlist.Playing the songs in a playlist1. Open the Music app.2. Swipe to the Playlists tab.3. Tap a playlist, and then tap the song you want to play first.The song starts playing on the Now playing tab.Deleting playlistsThe Recently played and the Recently added playlists can't be deleted.1. Open the Music app.2. Swipe to the Playlists tab.3. You can:§Press and hold the playlist you want to delete, and then tap Delete playlist.§Tap > Delete playlists to remove several playlists.79 EntertainmentOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-79.png)
![Adding a song to the queueWhile playing a song, you can also browse other tracks stored on HTC One max. Adda song or an album to the queue so it plays when the current playlist has finishedplaying.1. While a song is playing, browse for other tracks.2. Do any of the following:§Browse for the album or playlist that you want, press and hold it, and thentap Add to queue.§Browse for an artist or song, and then tap > Add to queue.The songs you've added appear on the Queue tab.Updating album covers and artist photosTo save on data usage, you might want to connect to a Wi-Fi network whenupdating your album covers and artist photos. In Music settings, select Wi-Fi only.1. Open the Music app.2. Swipe to the Artists or Albums tab.3. Tap > Update artist photos or Update album art.If you want HTC One max to automatically check and update your music collection,tap on the Music app's main screen, and then tap Settings. Select Album art andArtist photos.Setting a song as a ringtonePick a song from your Music library and set it as your ringtone or as ringtone for afavorite contact.1. Open the Music app.2. Play the song that you want to set as a ringtone.3. Tap > Set as ringtone.4. Tap Phone ringtone or Contact ringtone. If you select Contact ringtone, choosethe contacts you want to associate the ringtone with.80 EntertainmentOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-80.png)
![Trimming an MP3 ringtoneUse the Music app's ringtone trimmer if you want to set only a part of the song asringtone.1. When you find the song that you want, tap > Set as ringtone > Trim theringtone.2. Drag the trim sliders to the part where you want the ringtone to begin andend. For a more precise trimming, tap the left or right arrow buttons. Time markersindicate where you are on the song.3. When you're done trimming, tap Set as.4. Choose whether to set your trimmed song as your Phone ringtone or Contactringtone.You can see your new ringtone in the phone settings. Go to Settings > Sound >Ringtone.Viewing song lyricsLove a song so much that you want to sing along? HTC One max gives your music anextra kick with song lyrics and cool music visualizations.To save on data usage, connect to a Wi-Fi network when downloading lyrics. InMusic settings, select Wi-Fi only.1. Open the Music app.2. Browse to the song you want to play and tap it.3. Swipe to the Visualizer tab to view the lyrics. Song lyrics appear onscreen ifcontent has been successfully downloaded. Want a different visual for your music? Tap > Scene and select a scene. If youwant the scene to change for every song, select Random.4. Tap the screen to display the lyrics in full screen.5. To jump to another part of the song, tap the screen to make the progress barappear. Press and drag your finger across the progress bar, or press and hold or .6. To scroll through the lyrics, swipe up or down on the screen.Not all languages are supported.81 EntertainmentOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-81.png)
![Looking up related music infoSoundHound can find info about the song you're listening to. You can look up thelyrics, learn about the artist's tour dates, and more.While a song is playing, tap > Get info.Finding music videos on YouTubeIt's easy to find music videos of the song you’re listening to on YouTube®.On the Now playing screen, tap > Search > YouTube.TVEnjoying TV with HTC One maxThe TV app makes HTC One max a key part of your entertainment experience. The TVapp lets you easily tune into your preferred shows, get reminded when your favoriteshow is on, see what shows are coming up, and more.Discover current and upcoming programs with the intelligent electronic programguide (EPG) that learns your viewing habits and suggests shows you might like. TheTV app can also remember more than one EPG, so if you have more than one serviceprovider, you can get reminders for any of them.EPG information is only available for some countries.Setting up the TV appMake sure that you have an Internet connection before you set up the EPG.1. Open the TV app.2. Tap Next.3. Select your location, and then tap Next.Depending on your location, you may be asked to enter your postal code orselect your region.4. Choose your TV service provider, and then tap Next. Your cable or service provider may not be supported by the TV app.5. Select the channels included in your cable package, and then tap Next.82 EntertainmentOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-82.png)
![6. Select your video on demand services, and then tap Next. The available video on demand services depend on your location.7. Tap next to your favorite shows. If you don't find your favorite shows in thelist, tap , enter the show's name, and then tap .8. Tap Finish.Using the EPGUse the TV app's EPG (electronic program guide) to check what's showing on yourTV, view show details, or schedule TV reminders.You need to set up a remote before using the TV app. See Setting up your remotecontrol on page 85.1. Open the TV app.2. Do one of the following:§Tap a thumbnail to check the show's title, cast, and synopsis.§Tap to watch the show or movie on your TV.§Press and hold a thumbnail to see the options menu.§Tap to change the type of shows you want to display on the EPG or toview the channel guide.To make changes to your EPG settings, add remotes, and more, tap > Settings.Adding another EPGIf you have more than one TV service provider, you can add additional EPGs to the TVapp and easily switch between them on the HTC One max. The TV app is designed onthe concept of Rooms. For each Room you can add one EPG and one remote.§You can only set up another EPG for a TV service provider from the same locationor country. When you change the location or country, previously created EPGs andremotes will be deleted.§There is a limit to the number of Rooms you can add. When you reach themaximum number, you'll need to remove one before you can add another.1. Open the TV app.2. On the TV app main screen, tap > Settings > Rooms.3. Tap and enter a name for the new Room.83 EntertainmentOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-83.png)
![4. With Create a new room selected, tap Next. If you want to duplicate an existing EPG, select the Room with the EPG you want tocopy.5. Follow the onscreen instructions to setup the EPG.To switch between EPGs, tap on the main screen of the TV app.Editing, renaming, or removing a Room1. Open the TV app.2. Tap > Settings > Rooms.3. Tap a Room to hide or show channels, tag your favorite channels, and more.If you want to rename or remove the Room, tap while viewing the Room editor, andtap the option you want.Scheduling TV programsWhether your favorite show is airing in the next hour or next weekend, you'll nevermiss it when you set a reminder in the TV app. The Calendar app will notify you whenyour favorite show is about to start.1. Open the TV app.2. Tap a thumbnail of a program that interests you.3. Do one of the following:§For programs that are part of a series, tap an episode under Upcoming, andthen tap Remind me to add a reminder for that show.§For programs such as movies or sports events, tap Remind me under theUpcoming to add a reminder for a particular viewing time.The Reminder set icon appears next to the scheduled program.Before the show starts, you'll receive an upcoming event notification. Tap thenotification and then tap the link and open it in the TV app to view the show details.If you want to check what shows you scheduled, tap > My Picks. Then go to theScheduled tab.If you want to receive reminders for future episodes of a TV series, tap Add series.84 EntertainmentOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-84.png)
![Watching on demand videosAdd on-demand services to the TV app to enjoy available movies and TV showsanytime you want.§Most on-demand movies and TV shows can be purchased or rented from yourvideo service provider.§You may need to download the on demand service app first from Google Play.1. Open the TV app.2. Tap , select Movies, TV Programs, or Sports, and then go to the On demandtab.3. Tap a thumbnail to view details about the program.4. Do one of the following:§For programs that are part of a series, go to the On demand tab and selectan episode. Then tap the video on demand service that you want to use towatch the show.§For programs such as movies or sports events, tap the video on demandservice that you want to use to watch the show.To add or remove video on demand services, tap > Settings > On Demand.Setting up your remote controlTired of shuffling your TV, set top box, and home theater system remote controlswhile watching TV? You can combine them into one remote.§Make sure you have created a Room. By default, your first Room will be called "TVRoom". See Adding another EPG on page 83 to add more Rooms.§Make sure HTC One max has an Internet connection.1. Open the TV app.2. Tap to select the Room you want to create a remote for.3. Tap > Start.4. Select the devices you want to control with your remote, and then tap Next. The TV option can't be deselected.5. Select the brand of your TV, and then tap Next.6. Make sure your TV is off, and then tap Next.85 EntertainmentOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-85.png)
![7. Point HTC One max towards the TV and tap the blinking button on the screen.8. Tap Yes if HTC One max was able to turn on your TV, and then follow theonscreen instructions to continue setting up the other devices. §If the TV didn't turn on, tap No. HTC One max will try another remotecontrol profile.§If a matching remote control profile isn't found, you'll need to manually setup the remote control.Customizing the remote control buttonsAre the predefined buttons not to your liking? You can change any button.It is recommended that you do not change Number pad buttons to avoid conflictwith the EPG.1. Open the TV app.2. Tap > > Button setup.3. Tap a button to configure. Red buttons (except for the Record button) have not been configured.4. Align the IR port on HTC One max with the IR port on your device's remotecontrol. Your HTC One max and your device's remote control should be lessthan 5 cm apart.5. On your device's remote control, press and hold the button you want to add toHTC One max.6. Tap the blinking onscreen button to test the button.7. Tap Yes to finish setting up the button. If you tap No, you'll be prompted to try again.8. Press until you exit the Button setup mode.Controlling your TV with HTC One max1. Open the TV app.2. Tap .3. Do any of the following:Turn the TV, set top box, orhome theater system on or offOn the Power & input tab, tap the On, Off,On/Off button under the device name.Change the input source forthe TV or home theater systemOn the Power & input tab, tap the Inputbutton under the device name.86 EntertainmentOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-86.png)
![Change channels, adjust ormute the volume, and moreGo to the Ch/Vol tab.Enter channel numbers directly Go to the Number pad tab.Switch between recentlywatched channelsOn the Number pad tab, tap . You can alsoswitch to a recently watched channel in theNotifications panel.Access the playback controls Go to the Ch/Vol tab.To automatically turn on the display when you pick up HTC One max while usingthe TV app, select the Auto Wake option in > Settings.Controlling your TV from the Notifications panelGet a call while watching TV? You can easily use HTC One max to mute the TV andmore.1. Slide open the Notifications panel.2. Tap the controls to mute the TV, switch channels, and more.87 EntertainmentOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-87.png)
![Wireless mediaConnecting to your home entertainment systemWant to make your HTC One max experience bigger and louder? Share your videos,music, and more to external devices through DLNA, HTC Media Link HD, Miracast™, orA2DP (Bluetooth) with a simple gesture.Some devices may need to be paired before you can share to them.About HTC Media Link HDYou can plug in HTC Media Link HD to any TV with HDMI port, and use it to displaycontent wirelessly to your TV.HTC Media Link HD is sold separately.Easy to set up and useWith just a three-finger swipe, connect HTC One max to HTC Media Link HD and shareon the big screen.Multitask with dual-screen displayHTC Media Link HD gives you dual-screen display when you're:§Viewing a video in Gallery§Playing music in the HTC Music appWhile you're playing media on the big screen, you can multitask and do other thingssuch as take calls, browse the Web, or send email on HTC One max.Turns your TV into a digital photo frameUse the TV screen saver feature to store up to 30 photos from HTC One max on HTCMedia Link HD, and display them as a slideshow on your TV.To find out more about setting up HTC Media Link HD and using it with HTC One max,refer to the HTC Media Link HD user guide.88 EntertainmentOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-88.png)
![Sharing your media on DLNA devicesIf you'll be using a DLNA compliant TV or audio system, refer to its documentationon how to connect it to your home network.1. Connect HTC One max to your home network via Wi-Fi.2. Open the Gallery or Music app.3. Locate the media stored on HTC One max that you want to share, and then tapit.4. Swipe up with three fingers to show the Media output screen.5. Choose the device on your network where you want to play the media.6. Once connected to the other device, tap the onscreen controls to controlplayback, adjust the volume, and more.For more information about DLNA, visit www.dlna.org.89 EntertainmentOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-89.png)
![StorageTypes of storageWant to know what types of storage you can use for your apps, data, and files?HTC One max has these storage types:PhonestorageThis storage combines both the internal storage, where apps, email, data,and text messages are stored, and the file storage, where photos, videos,and music files are kept.If you are running out of phone storage, see Making more storage spaceon page 91 for some tips on how to free up space.StoragecardUse a storage card for storing more files. You can also set apps such asCamera to store directly to the card.USBstorageWhen you plug in an external USB storage device (such as a USB flashdrive or an SD card reader), you can view photos and videos stored onthe device right from Gallery and play songs stored on the device inMusic. You can also open PDFs and edit Office documents.You need a special cable to connect HTC One max and a USB storagedevice. HTC One max supports USB storage devices (except portablehard drives) up to 64 GB.Copying files to or from HTC One maxYou can copy your music, photos, and other files to HTC One max.Save and close your files before copying them from your computer toHTC One max, or vice versa.1. Connect HTC One max to the computer using the supplied USB cable. You'll seeoptions for viewing or importing files on the computer screen.2. Choose to view files.3. Copy the files from your computer to HTC One max, or vice versa.4. After copying the files, disconnect HTC One max from the computer.90 StorageOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-90.png)
![Making more storage spaceAs you use HTC One max, you'll accumulate data and fill its storage capacity overtime. Here are some tips on how to increase storage space.Run the storage wizardEasily free up space in the phone storage by cleaning the application cache,uninstalling apps, and changing settings so that only the most recent data is kept. InSettings, tap Storage > Make more space.Store files in Google DrivePhotos, email attachments, and other documents can be stored in Google Drive™ andaccessed anywhere you are. You can set the Camera app to automatically uploadphotos to Google Drive.Google Drive is a third-party app and is not provided by or associated with HTCCorporation.Manage photos and videos§Set the Camera app to automatically upload to a photo-sharing site or onlinestorage. When you reach the storage limit, just delete all your photos. You canretrieve them from the photo-sharing site or online storage when needed.Using data services while uploading photos and videos may be costly. You maywant to connect to Wi-Fi or disable auto upload of camera shots if you have alimited data plan.§After taking continuous camera shots, keep only the best shot and discard therest.§After editing a photo or trimming a video, the original file is kept. You can deleteoriginal files or move them to online storage or to your computer.§If you are only sending videos through MMS, use a lower resolution. High-resolution video takes up more space. In Camera settings, tap Video Quality tochange the resolution.Back up apps dataKeep only the most recent data from apps on HTC One max. You can back upcalendars, contacts, and bookmarks or export text messages, and personaldictionaries.Disable some appsApps, even if not used often, may be running in the background and downloadingdata into the phone storage. If the app cannot be removed, you can disable it. InSettings, tap Apps and then swipe to All. Select the app you want to disable, and thentap Disable.91 StorageOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-91.png)
![Encrypting data on HTC One maxYou can encrypt data such as your online accounts, settings, music files and othermedia. After encryption, you will need to enter the screen lock PIN or password toturn on your phone and access the data.Phone storage encryption§Set a lock screen PIN or password before encrypting your data.§Fully charge the battery and keep HTC One max connected to the power adapterduring encryption. The encryption process takes about an hour.§You cannot undo encryption. If you want to return to an unencrypted phone, youmust perform a factory reset.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Storage.2. Tap Phone storage encryption.3. Tap Encrypt.4. Enter the lock screen PIN or password, and tap Next.5. Tap Encrypt.Encryption starts and the progress is displayed. The phone may restart a few times.When the encryption process is complete, enter your PIN or password.Storage card encryptionYou can encrypt files on your storage card to protect your files. Storage cardencryption doesn't reformat or erase your card. Storage card files encrypted on thephone can be used only on the phone.§Set a lock screen PIN or password before encrypting your data.§Fully charge the battery and keep HTC One max connected to the power adapterduring encryption.§Only files added to the storage card after enabling encryption will be encrypted.Existing files will not be encrypted.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Storage.2. Tap File level SD card encryption3. Tap Encrypt.92 StorageOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-92.png)
![4. Enter the lock screen PIN or password, and tap Next.5. Tap Encrypt.Encryption starts and the progress is displayed. The storage card will be unavailableduring encryption.You can stop encrypting new files by clearing the File level SD card encryptionoption. Previously encrypted files will remain encrypted. To access these files, youmust enable File level SD card encryption again.93 StorageOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-93.png)
![PeopleYour contacts listThe People app lists all contacts you've stored on HTC One max and from onlineaccounts you're logged in to. Use the People app to easily manage communicationswith people that matter to you.1. Open the People app. 2. On your contacts list, you can:§View your profile and edit your contact information.§Create, edit, find, or send contacts.§Tap a contact photo to find ways to quickly connect with the contact.§See a notification icon when a contact has sent you new messages.To sort your contacts by their first or last name, tap > Settings > Sort contact list.Filtering your contacts listWhen your contacts list gets long, you can choose which contact accounts to show.1. On the People tab, tap .2. Choose the accounts that contain the contacts you want to display.3. Press .94 PeopleOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-94.png)
![Finding peopleSearch for contacts stored on HTC One max, your company directory if you have anExchange ActiveSync account, or social networks you've signed into.1. Open the People app.2. On the People tab, you can:§Find people in your contacts list. Tap the Search people box, and then enterthe first few letters of the contact name.§Find people on your company directory. Tap the Search people box, enterthe first few letters of the contact name, and then tap Search contacts inyour Company Directory.§Search for people you know on your social networks. Tap > Settings >Find people you know on, and then select the social networks you'resigned in to. The People app then uploads your contacts to the selectedsocial networks to help you find friends.Aside from searching for a contact by name, you can search using a contact's emailaddress or company name. On the People tab, tap > Settings > Search contactsby, and then choose a search criteria.Setting up your profileStore your personal contact information to easily send it to other people.1. Do one of the following:§On the People tab, tap My profile.§With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick settings.Tap the Me tile (or your contact name, if you've already signed in to yourGoogle account), and then tap Me or your contact name again.2. Tap Edit my contact card.3. Enter or edit your name and contact details.4. Tap (or the current photo) to change your contact photo.5. Tap Save.Aside from your contact details, your profile also shows updates you've posted onyour social networks and your online photo albums.95 PeopleOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-95.png)
![Adding a new contact1. On the People tab, tap .2. Tap the Name field, and then enter the contact name. Tap if you want to separately enter the contact's first, middle, and last name.Depending on the contact type, you may also be able to add other info such as aname suffix (for example, "Jr.").3. Select the Contact type. This determines which account the contact will syncwith. Some fields may not be available when you’re adding contacts to a SIM card.4. Enter the contact information in the fields provided.5. Tap Save.When you tap the added contact on your contacts list, you'll see the contactinformation and your exchange of messages and calls. Depending on the informationthat you've added to the contact (such as an email address), you'll also be able to seethe contact's social network updates, events, and photos.How do I add an extension number to a contact number?While creating a new contact in People, you can add an extension number totheir number so you can skip the voice prompts when calling.1. After entering the number of the main line, do one of the following:§Tap P(,) to insert a pause before the extension number is dialedautomatically. To make the pause longer, tap P(,) again.§Tap W(;) to be prompted to confirm the extension number.2. Enter the extension number.96 PeopleOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-96.png)
![Editing a contact’s informationSocial network contacts cannot be edited.1. On the People tab, press and hold the contact, and then tap Edit contact.2. Enter the new information.3. Tap Save.Getting in touch with a contact1. Open the People app.2. Tap a contact's photo (not the name), and then choose how you want to get intouch with that contact. For more ways of getting in touch with your contact, tap an icon below the contactphoto.Importing or copying contactsImporting contacts from your micro SIM card1. On the People tab, tap > Manage contacts.2. Tap Import/Export contacts > Import from SIM card.3. If you have a Google or Exchange ActiveSync account, tap the type for theimported contacts.97 PeopleOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-97.png)
![4. Select the contacts you want to import.5. Tap Save.Importing a contact from an Exchange ActiveSync account1. On the People tab, enter the contact's name or email address in the search box.2. Tap Search contacts in your Company Directory.3. Tap the name of the contact you want copied to HTC One max.4. Tap to import the contact.Copying contacts from one account to another1. On the People tab, tap > Manage contacts.2. Tap Copy contacts, and then choose a contact type or online account to copyfrom. Contacts from your social network accounts may not be copied.3. Select a contact type or account you want to save to.Merging contact informationAvoid duplicate entries by merging contact information from different sources, suchas your social network accounts, into one contact.Accepting contact link suggestionsWhen HTC One max finds contacts that can be merged, you’ll see a link notificationwhen you open the People app.1. On the People tab, tap the Link suggestion notification when available. You'll seea list of suggested contacts to merge.2. Choose the contacts you want to merge.If you don't want to receive contact link suggestions, on the People tab, tap >Settings. Clear the Suggest contact link option.98 PeopleOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-98.png)
![Manually merging contact information1. On the People tab, tap the name of the contact (not the icon or photo) youwant to link.2. Tap > Link.3. You can:§Under Suggest links, tap to link the contact to an account.§Under Add contact, tap one of the options to link to another contact.Breaking the link1. On the People tab, tap the name of the contact (not the icon or photo) whoselink you want to break.2. Tap > Link.3. Under the Linked contacts section, tap beside an account to break thelink.Sending contact information1. On the People tab, do one of the following:To send Do thisSomeone's contactinformationPress and hold the name of the contact (not the iconor photo), and then tap Send contact as vCard.Your contactinformationPress and hold My profile, and then tap Send myprofile.2. Choose how you want to send the vCard.3. Select the type of information you want to send.4. Tap Send.Sending multiple contact cards1. On the People tab, tap > Send contacts.2. Select the contacts whose contact information you want to share3. Tap Send.4. Choose how you want to send the contact cards.99 PeopleOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-99.png)
![Contact groupsOrganize your friends, family, and colleagues into groups so you can quickly send amessage or email to everyone in the group. We’ve also set up the Frequent group toautomatically add the contacts you dial or get calls from the most.HTC One max also syncs with groups you've created in your Google Account.Creating a group1. On the Groups tab, tap .2. Enter a name for the group, and then tap > Add contact to group.3. Select the contacts you want to add, and then tap Save.4. When your group is complete, tap Save.Sending a message or email to a groupYou will be charged for each text message sent. For example, if you send amessage to a group of five people, you will be charged for five messages.1. On the Groups tab, tap the group you want to send a message or email to.2. Go to the Group action tab.3. Choose if you want to send a group message or group email.Editing a group1. On the Groups tab, press and hold the group, and then tap Edit group.2. You can:§Change the group name. You can only change the name for groups thatyou have created.§Add more contacts to the group. Tap > Add contact to group.Contact not in your list? On the Groups tab, tap the name of the group where youwant to add the contact, and then tap > Create a new contact.§Rearrange the group members. Press and hold at the end of thecontact’s name, and then drag it to its new position.§Select the contacts you want to remove from the group.3. Tap Save.100 PeopleOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-100.png)
![Managing your contact groups1. On the Groups tab, tap > Edit groups.2. You can:§Rearrange the contact groups. Press and hold at the end of the groupname, and then drag it to its new position.§Select the contact groups you want to remove.3. Tap Save.101 PeopleOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-101.png)
![EmailGmailViewing your Gmail InboxAll your received email messages are delivered to your Inbox.1. Open the Gmail app.2. Do any of the following from your Inbox.§Tap an email message (not the sender image or letter tile) to read, forward,or reply to the message.§Tap Inbox at the top bar to switch to your other Gmail™ account or todisplay drafts, sent messages, or other email labels.§Tap the sender image or letter tile to select one or more messages orconversations. You can then tap the onscreen buttons at the top bar toarchive, delete, or mark the selected messages or conversations.Get help in using Gmail by tapping > Help.102 EmailOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-102.png)
![Sending an email message in Gmail1. In the inbox of the Gmail account you want to use, tap (or tap >Compose).2. Fill in one or more recipients. Want to loop in more recipients in a carbon copy (Cc) or blind carbon copy (Bcc)of the email message? Tap > Add Cc/Bcc.3. Enter the email subject, and then compose your message.4. If you want to attach a photo or video, tap , and then tap the attachment type.5. Tap to send.Replying to or forwarding email messages in Gmail1. In the Gmail inbox, tap the email message or conversation.2. To reply to the sender, tap . Or, tap and choose whether to Reply all orForward.3. Do one of the following:§If you're replying to the sender or you selected Reply all, enter your replymessage.§If you selected Forward, specify the message recipients.Tap Respond inline if you want to interleave your new message with the receivedemail. But this removes any attachments or formatting in the original emailmessage.4. Tap to send.103 EmailOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-103.png)
![MailChecking your mailThe Mail app is where you read, send, and organize email messages from one or moreemail accounts that you’ve set up on HTC One max.1. Open the Mail app. The inbox of one of your email accounts appears.2. Do any of the following:§Tap an email message to read.§To switch between email accounts, tap the bar that shows the current emailaccount, and then tap another account.§To display email messages in another mail folder, tap > Folder, and thentap the folder you want to view.§To view email messages from all your accounts, tap the bar that shows thecurrent email account, and then tap All accounts.§To change an email account's settings, select the account and then tap >Settings.Organizing your inboxDo you have a big pile of email messages in your inbox? Organize your emailmessages into tabs and quickly find the messages you want.1. Switch to the email account that you want to use.2. In the inbox, tap > Filters.3. Select the tabs you want to add to the inbox, and then tap Done.4. Swipe to the added tab to check your email messages.104 EmailOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-104.png)
![Sending an email message1. Open the Mail app.2. Switch to the email account that you want to use.3. Tap .4. Fill in one or more recipients. Want to loop in more recipients in a carbon copy (Cc) or blind carbon copy (Bcc)of the email message? Tap > Show Cc/Bcc.5. Enter the subject, and then compose your message.6. Do any of the following:§Add an attachment. Tap and then choose what you want to attach.§Set the priority for an important message. Tap > Set priority.7. Tap . To save the email as draft and send it later, tap > Save. Or press .Resuming a draft email message1. In an email account inbox, tap > Folder > Drafts.2. Tap the message.3. When you finish editing the message, tap .Reading and replying to an email message1. Open the Mail app.2. Switch to the email account you want to use.3. In the email account inbox, tap the email message or conversation you want toread. If you want to read a particular message inside an email conversation, tap toexpand the conversation, and then tap the email message.4. Tap Reply or Reply All. Tap for more actions for the email.Saving an image in an email messageWhile viewing an email message, press and hold an embedded image, and then tapSave. You'll find the saved image under the Downloads folder.You can also copy the image to the clipboard or set it as your wallpaper.105 EmailOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-105.png)
![Saving an email message in the Tasks appSave an email message in your Tasks list so you can remind yourself when to reply.1. In an email account inbox, press and hold the email message, and then tap Saveas task.2. Enter the task details, and then tap Save.Managing email messagesThe Mail app provides easy ways to sort, move, or delete your email messages.Sorting email messagesCustomize how you sort your email messages.In an email account inbox, tap > Sort, and select from the sorting options.To quickly scroll through the message list based on the sorting option you'veselected, press and hold two fingers on any email message, and then drag upwardor downward.Moving email messages to another folder1. Switch to the email account you want to use.2. Select the email messages you want to move. To select all, select one email message first, and then tap > Select all.3. Tap Move to, and then select a folder.Deleting email messages1. Switch to the email account you want to use.2. Select the email messages you want to delete. To select all, select one email message first, and then tap > Select all.3. Tap Delete.Searching email messages1. Tap .2. If you want to refine or filter your search, tap , check the search options, andthen tap OK. For example, you can focus the search on a part of an email orfilter email messages that have attachments or tagged as high priority.106 EmailOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-106.png)
![3. In the search box, enter the words you want to search for.4. Tap a result to open the email message.Searching for emails from a contactDo you remember the sender, but can't find a particular email from him or her?1. Switch to the email account you want to use.2. Press and hold an email message from a contact.3. Tap Search the mail from the sender. A list of email messages from that contactappears.Working with Exchange ActiveSync emailEnjoy the powerful email features of Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync right onHTC One max. Flag important email messages, set your out of the office reply, or sendinvites to your next team meeting while you're on the go.Flagging an email1. Switch to your Exchange ActiveSync account.2. While viewing the inbox, tap the flag icon that appears beside an email messageor conversation. To flag an email message inside a conversation, tap to expand the conversation,and then tap the flag icon of the email message.Setting your Out of the office status1. Switch to your Exchange ActiveSync account.2. Tap > Out of the office.3. Tap your current office status, and then select Out of the office.4. Set the dates and times.5. Enter the auto-reply message.6. If you want a different auto-reply message for recipients outside yourorganization, tap the Send replies to external senders option, and then enter theauto-reply message in the box.7. Tap Save.Sending a meeting request1. Switch to your Exchange ActiveSync account.2. Tap > New meeting invitation.3. Enter the meeting details.4. Tap Save. Or tap Send if you've invited people to the meeting.107 EmailOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-107.png)
![Adding an email accountSet up additional email accounts such as another Microsoft Exchange ActiveSyncaccount or an account from a Web-based email service or email provider.If you're adding a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync or a POP3/IMAP email account,ask your network administrator or email service provider for additional emailsettings that you may need.1. Open the Mail app.2. Tap > Add account.3. Select an email account type from the list of email providers. Otherwise, tapOther (POP3/IMAP).4. Enter the email address and password for your email account, and then tapNext. Some email accounts allow you to set the sync schedule. By default, HTC One maxuses Smart Sync to save battery power. See What is Smart Sync? on page 108.5. Enter a name for your email account, and then tap Finish setup.What is Smart Sync?Smart Sync automatically extends the sync time the longer the Mail app is inactive.Set your email account to Smart Sync when you don't need to check new emailmessages frequently. Smart Sync helps save battery power.If you want to receive email messages as they arrive, select another peak and off-peaksync schedule in the email account's Sync, Send & Receive settings.108 EmailOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-108.png)
![Travel and mapsLocation settingsTurning location services on or offIn order to find your location on HTC One max, you need to enable location sources.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Location.2. Select or clear the location sources you want to turn on or off.Google MapsAbout Google MapsGoogle Maps™ lets you track your current location, view real-time traffic situations,and receive detailed directions to your destination.It also provides a search tool where you can locate places of interest or an address ona map, or view locations at street level.§To find your location with Google Maps, you need to enable location sources.§The Google Maps app does not cover every country or city.Getting around mapsWhen you open Google Maps, you can easily find your location on the map or checkout nearby places by panning and zooming in and out on the map.1. Open the Maps app.2. Tap to show your current location. The blue marker or shows yourcurrent location on the map.109 Travel and mapsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-109.png)
![3. Navigate the map using finger gestures.§Slide your finger on any direction to pan.§Double-tap the map or slide two fingers apart over an area to zoom in.§Double-tap the map with two fingers or slide two fingers together over anarea to zoom out.§Press and hold an area with two fingers and then drag your fingers in acircular motion to rotate the map.§Press and hold an area with two fingers and then swipe down to see anangled view of the map. Swipe up to return to overhead view.4. Tap to turn Compass mode on. In Compass mode, the map orients itselfdepending on the direction you're facing. To exit Compass mode, tap . Add a map view to see more information overlaid on the map. Tap , and then tapa map view such as Traffic or Public transit. To remove the map view, tap it againon the map view list.Searching for a locationUse Google Maps to search for a location, such as an address or a type of business orestablishment (for example, museums).1. Open the Maps app.2. Tap the search box and then enter the place you want to search for.110 Travel and mapsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-110.png)
![3. Tap the Enter key on the keyboard or tap a suggested search item. The firstlocation on the search appears with a place marker and its info sheet displaysat the bottom of the screen. All other search results are indicated by a red dotor a smart map icon.§To check the next or previous location on the search, swipe the info sheet left orright.§To view the search results list, tap .4. Tap the info sheet to check the address, get directions, see the location in StreetView (if available), and more.To clear the map and search another location, swipe down the info sheet (if it'sexpanded), and then tap .Finding services near youQuickly search for banks, gas stations, grocery stores, and other services nearby.1. Open the Maps app.2. Tap to show your current location.3. Tap the search box and then press to hide the keyboard.4. Tap one of the service icons (such as grocery or bank) or tap to selectother services.5. Tap the info sheet to check the address, get directions, see the location in StreetView (if available), and more.111 Travel and mapsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-111.png)
![Checking the details of a location1. Open the Maps app.2. Press and hold a location on the map. A place marker opens and the location'sinfo sheet appears at the bottom of the screen.3. Tap the place marker or the info sheet to call, get directions, view the place inStreet View, and more.Exploring places and activities near youGoogle Maps lets you find places of interest where you can dine, sleep, shop, andmore.This feature may not be available for certain countries and locales.1. Open the Maps app.2. Tap to show your current location.3. Tap the search box and then press to hide the keyboard.4. Tap the Explore card to open the Explore screen.5. Tap an activity, and then tap a place of interest from the list. The place isdisplayed on the map.6. Tap the info sheet to check the address, get directions, see the location in StreetView (if available), and more. Scroll down the screen to view more information. To find another place or activity, press twice to return to the Explore screen.Getting directionsGet detailed directions to your destination. Google Maps provides travel directions bycar, public transit, bike, or foot.1. Open the Maps app.2. Tap .3. Choose how you want to get to your destination.4. Use your current location as starting point, or tap My location to enter yourstarting point or select a location from your search history.5. Tap Choose destination, and then enter or select your destination. If you're taking public transit, tap to set the date and time of travel, or tapOptions to set your route preferences.112 Travel and mapsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-112.png)
![6. Tap a route or transit option to view the directions on the map. You'll also seethe travel duration on the info sheet at the bottom of the screen.7. Tap the info sheet to view the directions in a list.When you’re finished viewing or following the directions, tap to reset the map.Your destination is automatically saved in the Google Maps history.HTC CarOn the road with HTC CarNow when you drive, you can easily use HTC One max to reach your destination, keepyou entertained, and help you stay in touch with the people that matter to you.Access music, phone calls, maps, and more with HTC Car.1. HTC Car instantly launches when you mount HTC One max in HTC Car Kit.2. Swipe up or down to see what you can do in HTC Car.When using HTC Car, return to the main screen from any other screen by pressing.When you remove HTC One max from HTC Car Kit, HTC Car will automatically exit.You can also manually close HTC Car by pressing from the main screen.Using voice commands in HTC CarUse your voice to control HTC Car.1. In HTC Car, tap the screen with three fingers to activate the voice commandmode. You can also tap Speak on the main screen in HTC Car.2. Do one of the following:Call someone Say "Call [person's name in phonebook]"Play music Say "Play [song title, album, artist name,or genre]"Play the radio Say "Listen to [song title, artist name, orgenre]"Find something on themapSay "Find [name of place, address, type ofplace]"113 Travel and mapsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-113.png)
![Playing music in HTC Car1. In HTC Car, tap Music.2. Do one of the following:§Swipe left or right to browse by category.§Tap to search your collection.3. Tap an album, song, or playlist to listen to it.You can also play music by tapping Speak on the main screen and saying what youwant to hear. For example, say "Play Beethoven's 5th".Listening to Internet radio with TuneInRight from HTC Car, enjoy listening to Internet radio stations with TuneIn.1. In HTC Car, tap Internet Radio.2. Do one of the following:§Browse for available stations by category.§Tap to enter and search for stations by keyword such as artist name ortopic.3. Tap a station to start listening to it.§You can also find Internet radio stations by tapping Speak on the main screen andsaying what you want to hear. For example, say "Listen to comedy".§To ensure smooth playback, TuneIn preloads audio data (buffering) onHTC One max before playing your selected station. To set the amount of audio topreload, tap and choose a buffer time.114 Travel and mapsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-114.png)
![Finding your way with HTC CarHTC Car helps you to find your way to where you want to go. Easily find nearbyrestaurants and more on your weekends. HTC Car gives you the information you needso you won't get lost.Exploring what's around youFeeling adventurous? With just a few taps, you can find interesting places around youquickly.1. In HTC Car, tap Navigation.2. Do one of the following:§Tap a category.§Tap to enter your own search keywords.You can also find places by tapping Speak on the main screen and saying what youare looking for. For example say "Find parking".Finding places in HTC Car1. In HTC Car, tap Navigation.2. Do one of the following:Search for a new place 1. Tap .2. Type what you are looking for, and tap.Look up a previously searchedplaceTap Previous.Get directions for an upcomingevent in Calendar1. Tap Appointments.2. Tap an upcoming appointment from thelist.3. Tap an item to go to the map.Staying connected to your contactsJust because you're driving doesn't mean you have to be isolated from the rest of theworld. With HTC Car, you can take calls, make calls, and get notifications.Handling incoming calls in HTC CarWhen you receive an incoming call, you can easily answer or decline.§If you hear a voice prompt, say "yes" or "no" to answer or decline a call.§Tap Answer or Decline.115 Travel and mapsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-115.png)
![Making phone calls in HTC Car§Tap Dialer to open the dialpad.§Tap People and then browse a category or search by entering a name.§Tap Speak and say "Call" and the person's name. For example, say "CallJennifer Singer".Customizing HTC Car§To change the default behavior of HTC Car, tap Settings.§To add more apps to HTC Car, tap and select an app.116 Travel and mapsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-116.png)
![Google Play and other appsGetting appsGetting apps from Google PlayGoogle Play is the place to go to find new apps for HTC One max. Choose from a widevariety of free and paid apps ranging from productivity apps, entertainment, togames.§A Google Wallet™ payment service is required to purchase a paid app. You will beasked to confirm method of payment when you purchase an app.§The name of the Play Store app may differ depending on your region.§The ability to purchase apps varies by region.Finding and installing an appWhen you install apps and use them on HTC One max, they may require access toyour personal information or access to certain functions or settings. Download andinstall only apps that you trust.Be cautious when downloading apps that have access to functions or a significantamount of your data on HTC One max. You’re responsible for the results of usingdownloaded apps.1. Open the Play Store app.2. Browse or search for an app.3. When you find the app that you like, tap it and read its description and userreviews.4. To download or purchase the app, tap Install (for free apps) or the price button(for paid apps).5. Tap Accept. Apps sometimes get updated with improvements or bug fixes. To automaticallydownload updates, after installing the app, tap > Auto-update.To open the app, go to the All Apps screen and tap the app.117 Google Play and other appsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-117.png)
![Restoring apps from Google PlayUpgraded to a new phone, replaced a lost one, or performed a factory reset? Restoreapps that you previously downloaded.1. Open the Play Store app.2. Tap > My apps.3. Swipe to the All tab, and then tap the app you want to restore.4. Install the app.For more details, refer to the Google Play help.Downloading apps from the webYou can download apps directly from websites.Apps downloaded from websites can be from unknown sources. To help protectHTC One max and your personal data, we strongly recommend that you onlydownload from websites you trust.1. Open the browser, and then go to the website where you can download the appyou want.2. Follow the website's download instructions for the app.Before you can install the downloaded app, make sure that you've set HTC One maxto allow installation of third-party apps in Settings > Security > Unknown sources.After installing the app, make sure to go back to Settings > Security and clear theUnknown sources option. This can help protect your phone from installing insecureapps from the Web.Uninstalling an appIf you no longer need an app that you've downloaded and installed, you can easilyuninstall it.Most of the preloaded apps cannot be uninstalled.From the All Apps screen, press and hold the app you want to remove, and then dragit to Uninstall.If you purchased an app in Play Store, you can uninstall it for a refund within alimited time. To know more about the refund policy for paid apps, refer to theGoogle Play help.118 Google Play and other appsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-118.png)
![Essential appsUsing the ClockGet more from the Clock app than just the regular date and time. Use HTC One maxas a world clock to see the date and time in cities across the globe. You can also setalarms or track your time using the stopwatch or timer.Setting the date and time manually1. Open the Clock app.2. On the World Clock tab, tap > Local time settings.3. Clear Automatic date & time and Automatic time zone, and then set the timezone, date, and time as required.To display military time, choose the Use 24-hour format option.Setting an alarmYou can set up one or more alarms.1. Open the Clock app.2. On the Alarms tab, select the check box of an alarm and then tap that alarm.3. Under Set alarm, use the scroll wheels to set the alarm time.4. If you want the alarm for multiple days, tap Repeat.5. Tap Done.§To turn off an alarm, clear the check box of that alarm.§If you need to set more than three alarms, tap .Checking WeatherUse the Weather app and widget to check the current weather and weather forecastsfor the next few days. In addition to your current location, you can view weatherforecasts for other cities around the globe.1. Open the Weather app. You'll see the weather for different cities, includingwhere you are.2. Tap a city to view weather information.3. Swipe to the Hourly and Forecast tabs to view the forecast in your selectedlocation.4. To check the weather in other cities, tap , and then select the city you want.5. To add more cities, tap and then enter the location.Your settings in the Weather app also control the weather information that is shownin the Clock and Calendar.119 Google Play and other appsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-119.png)
![Viewing the CalendarUse the Calendar app to view your events, meetings, and appointments. If you'vesigned into your online accounts, related events will also appear in Calendar.1. Open the Calendar app.2. Tap , and then choose a calendar view.In any calendar view, return to the current date by tapping the today button beside.Month viewIn month view, you will see markers on days that have events. Upcoming events forthe day are also shown at the bottom of the screen.§Swipe left or right across the screen to view succeeding or previous months.§Tap a day to view the events for that day.§Press and hold a day to see more options.Day and agenda viewsDay view shows your day's schedule and weather forecast for the next few days, whileagenda view gives a quick glance of all your day's events.§Swipe left or right across the screen to view succeeding or previous days.§Tap an event to view its details.§If the event is a contact's birthday or anniversary, tap it to send a greeting.Need to see the event time in another time zone? In Day view, tap > Select 2ndtime zone > Choose location, and then enter the city name.Week viewWeek view displays a chart of the events of one week.§Swipe left or right across the screen to view succeeding or previous weeks.§Tap an event (shown as colored blocks) to view its details.120 Google Play and other appsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-120.png)
![Scheduling or editing an eventYou can create or edit events on HTC One max, and also sync events with yourGoogle or Exchange ActiveSync calendars.Editing events is not supported for all accounts.1. Open the Calendar app.2. On any Calendar view, do one of the following:Create an event Tap . Tap , and then select the calendar you will add theevent to.Edit an event View an event, and then tap .3. Enter and set the event details.4. To invite contacts from your Google or Exchange ActiveSync account, tap .5. Tap Save. If you've invited people to the event, tap Send or Send update.Checking your schedule for an eventAvoid juggling multiple meetings at the same time. In Calendar, you can check yourappointments to see if a new event would conflict with your schedule.1. When creating or editing an event, tap Check calendar.2. Press and hold the event box, and then drag it to an available time slot.3. Drag the top and bottom nodes to adjust the event's time duration. You'll see amessage if there are conflicts with other scheduled events.4. Tap Done to return to the event screen, and then save your event.Choosing which calendars to show1. In any calendar view, tap > Accounts (All calendars) or Accounts (Multi-calendar).2. Select or clear an account you wish to show or hide. If you have multiple calendars under an online account, tap to select theitems to include.§Calendars are synced on HTC One max, even if they are hidden.§You can also show or hide tasks that you've created on HTC One max.121 Google Play and other appsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-121.png)
![Why aren’t my calendar events showing up?If you can't find events from your email accounts or social networks inCalendar, check whether the Calendar sync is turned on in Settings.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Accounts & sync.2. Tap an account type. If multiple accounts are supported (such asExchange ActiveSync), tap the account you want to sync.3. Select Calendar, and then tap > Sync now.Sharing an eventYou can share a calendar event as a vCalendar using Bluetooth or by sending it as afile attachment with your email or message.1. Do one of the following:§While viewing an event, tap > Share via.§In day, agenda or week view, press and hold an event and then tap Sharevia.2. Choose how you want to send the event.You can also forward accepted meeting invitations from your Exchange ActiveSynccalendar. While viewing an event, tap > Forward. Compose your email message,and then send it.Accepting or declining a meeting invitationSwitch to Invites view to see meeting invitations which you have not yet accepted ordeclined.You must set up an Exchange ActiveSync account to receive meeting invitations inCalendar.1. Open the Calendar app.2. Tap > Invites, and then tap a meeting invitation.3. Accept, decline, or tentatively accept the invitation, or propose a new time. Tap to choose from more options, such as moving the invitation to a folder.If you need to cancel an accepted meeting invitation or propose a new time, view theevent details in Calendar, and then tap Response.122 Google Play and other appsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-122.png)
![Dismissing or snoozing event remindersIf you have set at least one reminder for an event, the upcoming event icon willappear in the notifications area of the status bar to remind you.1. Slide the Notifications panel open.2. If the notification shows that there are multiple reminders, tap it to see all thereminders. You can then choose to snooze or dismiss them.3. If you see a single event notification, spread your two fingers on the notificationto expand it. You can then:§Tap Snooze or Dismiss. Or drag the notification left or right to dismiss it.§Tap Send mail to send a quick response to the meeting attendees.To edit the preset quick responses or add your own, open Calendar, and then tap > Settings > Quick response.If you don't want to dismiss or snooze the calendar reminders, press from theNotifications panel to keep them pending in the notifications area of the status bar.Fun appsWatching videos on YouTubeCheck out the latest video sensations using the YouTube app.1. Open the YouTube app.2. Browse or search for a video.3. When you find the video that you like, tap it. Want to watch the video at a later time instead? Tap > Add to Watch later. Youcan access the video again from your account profile's Watch later list.4. While watching a video, you can:§Turn HTC One max sideways to watch the video in full screen.§Tap the video screen to pause or to resume playback, or drag the slider tojump to a different part of the video.§Scroll down the video information panel to see related videos andcomments from other viewers.§Touch to minimize the video screen and browse other videos. To closethe video thumbnail, swipe it left or right.Tap the YouTube icon to return to the previous screen.123 Google Play and other appsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-123.png)
![Preloading videosSet the YouTube app to preload videos so that you can watch them withoutinterruptions. Videos are preloaded when HTC One max is being charged and isconnected to a Wi-Fi network.For more information about preloading videos, refer to the YouTube help.1. Open the YouTube app.2. Tap > Settings > Preloading.3. Select what type of videos to preload.The videos are preloading when appears on Watch later screen or on the channelyou subscribed to. The icon changes to when the videos are ready.Clearing the search history1. In the YouTube app, tap > Settings.2. Tap Search > Clear search history.Listening to FM RadioListen to your favorite radio stations using the FM Radio app.You need to connect a headset first to the audio jack of HTC One max to use FMRadio. FM Radio uses the stereo headset as the FM radio antenna.1. Open the FM Radio app. The first time you open FM Radio, it scans for local FM stations that you canlisten to.2. While you're listening to an FM station, you can:§Tap or to go to the next or previous station.§Drag the slider to tune in to a frequency on the FM band. To fine tune theradio frequency, tap or .§Tap to mark a radio station as a favorite. To see your other favorites andpreset stations, tap .3. To turn off FM Radio, tap .124 Google Play and other appsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-124.png)
![Switching to Kid ModeWorried that your kids might wander off to inappropriate web sites or mess with yourimportant work files while using HTC One max? Use Kid Mode™ to let your childrenenjoy fun and age-appropriate games and more, while helping to protect yourimportant data from accidental deletion. To learn more about Kid Mode, visit www.zoodles.com.1. Open the Kid Mode app. The first time you use Kid Mode, you need to create or sign in to your Zoodles™account.2. On the Zoodles main screen, tap the profile that you created for your child.3. Tap the icons to access games and apps, play recorded storybook readings, andmore.How can I allow my child to access an app in Kid Mode?When in Kid Mode, you can choose which apps on HTC One max your childwill have access to.1. On the Zoodles main screen, tap Parent Dashboard. You can also go to Parent Dashboard from Settings > Security > Kid Mode.2. Confirm your action with your child lock setting (either by drawing theletter Z on the screen or by entering the child's birth year).3. Under Basic Features, tap Apps. You'll see a list of apps installed onHTC One max.4. Tap the check option beside the app that you want your child to be ableto use in Zoodles.Want to receive or block incoming calls while in Kid Mode? Under BasicFeatures, tap Settings and then select or clear the Allow incoming callscheck option.Closing Kid ModeOn the Zoodles main screen, tap and then confirm your action with your child locksetting (either by drawing the letter Z on the screen or by entering the child's birthyear).125 Google Play and other appsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-125.png)
![Productivity appsKeeping track of your tasksUse the Tasks app to organize and track to do and task lists. Create tasks on yourphone or sync them with your Google and Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts.You can also see your tasks in Calendar.Creating a task1. Open the Tasks app.2. To select the task account where you want to create the task, tap .3. Tap , and then enter the task details. Tasks created under My tasks can be linked to a contact (tap ) or to a location(tap ).4. Tap Save.Managing tasks1. Go to the list that contains the task.2. In the list of tasks, you can:Mark a taskcompleteTap the check box next to the task. To view completedtasks, tap > View completed.Sort tasks 1. Tap > Sort.2. Select how you want to sort the tasks.Edit a task 1. Tap the task that you want to edit, and then tap Edit.2. Edit the task details, and then tap Save.Delete a task Press and hold the task that you want to delete, and thentap Delete.Postpone a task 1. Press and hold a task, and then tap Postpone.2. Choose how long you want to postpone the task.Move a task toanother listYou can only move the task to another list that is under thesame account.1. Press and hold the task that you want to move, and thentap Move to.2. Tap the task list where you want the task to appear.126 Google Play and other appsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-126.png)
![Managing task lists1. In the Tasks app, tap > Manage lists.2. From here, you can:Show tasks To show all tasks under a list, tap a task list.Create a list Tap , and then choose an account for the list.Lists can't be created for Microsoft Exchange ActiveSyncaccounts.Rename a list 1. Tap at the right of a list, and then tap Rename.2. Enter a new name for the list, and then tap OK.Delete a list 1. Tap at the right of a list, and then tap Delete.2. Tap OK.You cannot delete a main list.Recording voice clipsUse Voice Recorder to capture information during lectures, interviews, or even tocreate your own audio log.1. Open the Voice Recorder app.2. Hold the microphone near the sound source.3. Tap to start recording a voice clip. Voice Recorder can run in the background while you do other things onHTC One max, except when you open other apps that also use audio functions.4. Tap to stop recording.To play back the voice clip, tap .To see your recorded voice clips, tap . Press and hold a voice clip to see optionsfor sharing, setting it as a ringtone, and more.127 Google Play and other appsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-127.png)
![Internet connectionsData connectionWhen you turn on HTC One max for the first time, it will be automatically set up touse your mobile operator's data connection (if the micro SIM card is inserted).HTC One max is available in either a 3G or LTE version, depending on your regionand mobile operator. You need an LTE plan to use your operator's 4G/LTE networkfor voice calls and data services. Check with your operator for details.Turning the data connection on or offTurning your data connection off saves battery life and money on data charges.1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. Tap the Mobile data tile to turn the data connection on and off.If you don’t have the data connection turned on and you’re also not connected to aWi-Fi network, you won’t receive automatic updates to your email, social networkaccounts, and other synced information.Adding a new access pointYou can add a new Access Point Name (APN) when roaming or if you have difficultyestablishing a data connection. APNs connect HTC One max to data networks forservices such as mobile web browsing.Before you add another data connection, have the access point name and settingsfrom your mobile operator ready (including username and password if required).1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. If Mobile data is off, tap the Mobile data tile to turn it on.3. Tap . The Mobile network settings screen opens.4. Tap Access point names.5. On the APNs screen, tap > New APN.6. Enter the APN settings.7. Tap > Save.8. Select the new APN on the APNs screen.128 Internet connectionsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-128.png)
![Managing your data usageIf you're on a limited data allowance, it's important to keep track of the activities andapps that usually send and receive data, such as browsing the web, syncing onlineaccounts, and sending email or sharing status updates.Here are some other examples:§Streaming web videos and music§Tuning in to Internet radio§Playing online games§Downloading apps, maps, and files§Refreshing apps to update info and feeds§Uploading and backing up your files to your online storage account§Using HTC One max as a Wi-Fi Hotspot§Sharing your mobile data connection by USB tetheringTo help you save on data usage, connect to a Wi-Fi network whenever possible andset your online accounts and emails to sync less frequently.Turning data roaming on or offConnect to your mobile operator’s partner networks and access data services whenyou’re out of your mobile operator’s coverage area.Using data services while roaming may be costly. Check with your mobile operatorfor data roaming rates before you use data roaming.1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. If Mobile data is off, tap the Mobile data tile to turn it on.3. Tap . The Mobile network settings screen opens.4. Select or clear the Data roaming option.Select the Data roaming sound option if you’d like HTC One max to play a sound soyou’ll know when it’s connecting to a roaming network.Keeping track of your data usageMonitor your data usage to help prevent going over your monthly data allowance.Data usage measured by HTC One max may differ from, and be less than, youractual data usage.1. Go to Settings, and then under Wireless & networks, tap More.2. Tap Usage.129 Internet connectionsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-129.png)
![3. On the Mobile tab, select Limit mobile data usage and tap OK to automaticallydisable your data connection when you reach the set limit.4. Drag the upper LIMIT line to set your monthly data limit.5. Select Alert me about data usage, and then drag the lower ALERT line to set analert before you reach your monthly data limit.6. Tap Reset data usage, and then set the day of the month when your usagecycle resets. This date is usually the start of your monthly billing cycle.7. Drag the vertical line markers to see how much data you've used during aparticular time interval.If you're connecting HTC One max to another portable Wi-Fi hotspot, tap >Mobile hotspots to restrict background data from downloading that may incurextra data fees.Viewing the data usage of apps1. Go to Settings, and then under Wireless & networks, tap More.2. Tap Usage.3. On the Mobile tab, drag the vertical line markers to see how much data you'veused during a particular time interval.4. Scroll down the screen to see a list of apps and their data usage info.5. Tap an app to see more details.Wi-FiTo use Wi-Fi, you need access to a wireless access point or “hotspot”.The availability and strength of a Wi-Fi signal varies depending on objects the Wi-Fisignal has to pass through (such as buildings or a wall between rooms).Turning Wi-Fi on and connecting to a wireless network1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. Tap the Wi-Fi tile to turn the Wi-Fi connection on.130 Internet connectionsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-130.png)
![3. Tap . Detected Wi-Fi networks will be listed.If the wireless network that you want is not listed, tap > Add network to manuallyadd it.4. Tap the Wi-Fi network you want to connect to. If you selected a securednetwork, you'll be asked to enter the network key or password.5. Tap Connect. You'll see the Wi-Fi icon in the status bar when connected.The next time HTC One max connects to a previously accessed secured wirelessnetwork, you won’t be asked to enter the key or other security information again.Preventing notifications from unsecured Wi-Fi networksYou can prevent getting notified by unsecured Wi-Fi networks.1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. If Wi-Fi connection is off, tap the Wi-Fi tile to turn it on.3. Tap . Detected Wi-Fi networks will be listed.4. Press and hold an unsecured Wi-Fi network you want to stop being notifiedabout, and tap Block network notification.5. To unblock an unsecured Wi-Fi network, press and hold the network name andtap Unblock network notification.Connecting to a Wi-Fi network via WPSIf you're using a Wi-Fi router with Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), you can connectHTC One max easily.1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. If Wi-Fi connection is off, tap the Wi-Fi tile to turn it on.3. Tap . Detected Wi-Fi networks will be listed.4. Tap > WPS Push, and then press the WPS button on your Wi-Fi router. To use the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) PIN method, tap > WPS Pin Entry.Disconnecting from the current wireless network1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. If Wi-Fi connection is off, tap the Wi-Fi tile to turn it on.3. Tap . Detected Wi-Fi networks will be listed.4. You can:§Tap the wireless network that HTC One max is connected to, and then tapDisconnect.§If you want to remove the settings for this network, press and hold thenetwork name, and then tap Forget network.131 Internet connectionsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-131.png)
![Connecting to a different Wi-Fi network1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. If Wi-Fi connection is off, tap the Wi-Fi tile to turn it on.3. Tap . Detected Wi-Fi networks will be listed.To manually scan for available Wi-Fi networks, tap > Scan.4. Tap a Wi-Fi network to connect to it.Logging into a public Wi-Fi network automatically (WISPr)You can set HTC One max to automatically log into a public Wi-Fi network that youregularly use. This saves you the trouble of going through the Wi-Fi provider's webauthentication every time you connect to their Wi-Fi network. Just add your logincredentials to the WISPr (Wireless Internet Service Provider roaming) settings.The access point of the Wi-Fi network needs to support the WISPr web portal.Consult the Wi-Fi provider for details.1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. If Wi-Fi connection is off, tap the Wi-Fi tile to turn it on.3. Tap . Detected Wi-Fi networks will be listed.4. Tap > Advanced.5. Under WISPr settings, select the Auto login option.6. Tap WISPr account settings > Add a new account.7. Tap each item onscreen to enter the service provider name, your login name(with the full domain name), and password.8. Tap > Save9. Turn Wi-Fi on, and then connect to the public Wi-Fi network.§If you have access to several public Wi-Fi networks, you can add up to five sets oflogin credentials to the WISPr accounts list.§In the WISPr accounts list, press and hold an account to remove or edit it.Connecting to a virtual private network (VPN)Add virtual private networks (VPNs) so you can connect and access resources insidea secured local network, such as your corporate network.Before you can connect to your organization's local network, you may be asked to:132 Internet connectionsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-132.png)
![§Install security certificates§Enter your login credentials§Download and install a required VPN app on HTC One maxContact your network administrator for details. Also, HTC One max must firstestablish a Wi-Fi or data connection before you can start a VPN connection.Adding a VPN connectionYou must first set a lock screen PIN or password before you can use credentialstorage and set up the VPN.1. Go to Settings, and then under Wireless & networks, tap More.2. Tap VPN > > Add VPN profile.3. Enter the VPN settings and set them up according to the security details yournetwork administrator gave you.4. Tap Save.Connecting to a VPN1. Go to Settings, and then under Wireless & networks, tap More.2. Tap VPN.3. Tap the VPN that you want to connect to.4. Enter your log in credentials, and then tap Connect. When you’re connected, theVPN connected icon appears in the notification area of the status bar.You can then open the web browser to access resources such as your corporatenetwork intranet.Disconnecting from a VPN1. Slide the Notifications panel open.2. Tap the VPN notification, and then tap Disconnect.133 Internet connectionsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-133.png)
![Using HTC One max as a wireless routerShare your data connection with other devices by turning HTC One max into awireless router.§Make sure the data connection is turned on.§You must have an approved data plan associated with your account from yourmobile service provider to use this service. Devices connected to your Wi-FiHotspot use data from your subscribed data plan.1. Go to Settings, and then under Wireless & networks, tap More.2. Tap Mobile network sharing > Portable Wi-Fi hotspot settings.3. Enter a router name or use the default router name.4. Choose the type of security and set the password (key) for your wireless router.If you selected None in Security, you don’t need to enter a password. The password is the key other people need to enter on their device so they canconnect and use HTC One max as a wireless router.5. Select the Portable Wi-Fi hotspot option to turn on the wireless router.HTC One max is ready to be used as a wireless router when you see on the statusbar.To help minimize security risks, use the default security settings and set a secureand unique password.134 Internet connectionsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-134.png)
![Sharing your phone's Internet connection byUSB tetheringNo Internet connection available for your computer? No problem. Use the dataconnection of HTC One max to connect to the Internet.§To make sure that the USB drivers for HTC One max are up-to-date, install thelatest version of HTC Sync Manager on your computer.§Make sure a SIM card with a data plan is inserted in HTC One max.§You may need to have USB tethering added to your data plan, and it may incuradditional cost. Contact your mobile service provider for details.§Make sure that mobile data is turned on.1. Go to Settings, and then under Wireless & networks, tap More.2. Tap Mobile network sharing > USB network setting > USB tethering. If you often switch between USB tethering and Internet pass-through, select Smartnetwork sharing to automatically turn on the connection type you need wheneveryou connect HTC One max with your computer.3. Connect HTC One max to your computer using the provided USB cable. Thenext time HTC One max connects to a computer, it will remember your settings.135 Internet connectionsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-135.png)
![Connecting to the Internet through acomputerIf you temporarily don’t have Internet access on HTC One max, you can still go onlineby using your computer’s Internet connection.§To make sure that the USB drivers for HTC One max are up-to-date, install thelatest version of HTC Sync Manager on your computer.§If your phone can't connect to the Internet via your computer's Internetconnection, you may need to configure your computer's firewall to allow this typeof connection. To find out how, refer to your operating system or security softwarehelp.§If your computer connects to the Internet via PPP (e.g. Dial UP, xDSL, or VPN),Internet Pass-through will only support TCP protocol.1. Go to Settings, and then under Wireless & networks, tap More.2. Tap Mobile network sharing > USB network setting > Internet pass-through. If you often switch between USB tethering and Internet pass-through, select Smartnetwork sharing to automatically turn on the connection type you need wheneveryou connect HTC One max with your computer.3. Connect HTC One max to your computer using the provided USB cable. Thenext time HTC One max connects to a computer, it will remember your settings.Wi-Fi printingConnect HTC One max to a supported printer via Wi-Fi and print out documents,email, photos, and more.Both printer and HTC One max must be turned on and connected to the same localnetwork. Connect HTC One max to the local network using Wi-Fi. To learn how toconnect the printer to a local network, refer to your printer user guide.1. While in an app (such as Mail or Calendar), open the item you want to print.2. Tap > Print (or More > Print).3. On the Print screen, tap the printer you want to use.136 Internet connectionsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-136.png)
![4. If there's more than one page to print, set the page range that you want. Tap Advanced to set the page size, print layout, and page orientation, and chooseif you want to print in color or black and white.5. Tap Print.You can check the printing details by opening the Notifications panel, and thentapping the item you're printing.Printing a photo1. While in Gallery, open the photo you want to print.2. Tap the photo.3. Tap > Print , and then tap the printer you want to use.4. Tap Print.You can check the printing details by opening the Notifications panel, and thentapping the item you're printing.Adding a printerIf your printer does not show up in the list, you must add it.The printer must be in the same Wi-Fi network that you are using.1. From the Print screen, tap Add printer.2. Enter the IP address of the printer that you want to add and choose a port. Ifyou do not know the IP address of the printer, ask for help from your networkadministrator.3. Tap Next, and then select the manufacturer and model of the printer.4. Tap Save.The printer appears on the list and you can tap it to print your photo or document.137 Internet connectionsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-137.png)
![Wireless sharingConnecting a Bluetooth headsetYou can listen to music over a Bluetooth stereo headset, or have hands-freeconversations using a compatible Bluetooth headset.§To listen to music with your headset, the headset must support the A2DPBluetooth profile.§Before you connect your headset, make it discoverable so HTC One max can findit. Refer to your headset manual for details.1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. If Bluetooth is off, tap the Bluetooth tile to turn it on.3. Tap . The Bluetooth screen opens.4. If you don't see your headset listed, tap and then tap Scan to refresh the list.5. When you see the name of your headset in the Available Devices section, tapthe name. HTC One max pairs with the headset and the headset connectionstatus is displayed in the Paired Devices section.If automatic pairing fails, enter the passcode supplied with your headset.When the Bluetooth headset is connected to HTC One max, the Bluetooth connectedicon is displayed in the status bar.Reconnecting a Bluetooth headsetNormally, you can easily reconnect your headset by switching on Bluetooth onHTC One max, and then turning on the headset.However, you might have to connect manually if your headset has been used withanother Bluetooth device.Make sure that the headset is discoverable. Refer to the headset manual for details.1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. If Bluetooth is off, tap the Bluetooth tile to turn it on.138 Wireless sharingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-138.png)
![3. Tap . The Bluetooth screen opens.4. Tap the headset’s name in the Paired Devices section.5. If prompted to enter a passcode, try 0000 or 1234, or consult the headsetdocumentation to find the passcode.If you still cannot reconnect to the headset, follow the instructions in Unpairing from aBluetooth device on page 139, and then follow the steps under Connecting aBluetooth headset on page 138.Unpairing from a Bluetooth device1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. If Bluetooth is off, tap the Bluetooth tile to turn it on.3. Tap . The Bluetooth screen opens.4. In the Paired devices section, tap next to the device to unpair.5. Tap Unpair.Where sent information is savedWhen you send information using Bluetooth, the location where it's saved depends onthe type of information and the receiving device.If you send a calendar event or contact, it is normally added directly to thecorresponding application on the receiving device.If you send another file type to a Windows computer, it is normally saved in theBluetooth Exchange folder within your personal document folders.§On Windows XP, the path may be: C:\Documents and Settings\[yourusername]\My Documents\Bluetooth Exchange§On Windows Vista®, the path may be: C:\Users\[your username]\Documents§On Windows 7, the path may be: C:\Users\[your username]\Documents\Bluetooth Exchange Folder§On Windows 8, the path may be: C:\Users\[your username]\DocumentsIf you send a file to another device, the saved location may depend on the file type.For example, if you send an image file to another mobile phone, it may be saved in afolder named “Images”.139 Wireless sharingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-139.png)
![Receiving files using BluetoothHTC One max lets you receive various files with Bluetooth, including photos, musictracks, contact info, calendar events, and documents such as PDFs.Refer to the device’s documentation for instructions on sending information overBluetooth.1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. If Bluetooth is off, tap the Bluetooth tile to turn it on.3. Tap . The Bluetooth screen opens.4. Tap the Bluetooth name of your device near the top of the screen to makeHTC One max visible to nearby Bluetooth devices.5. On the sending device, send one or more files to HTC One max.6. If asked, accept the pairing request on HTC One max and on the sending device.You may also be prompted to enter the same passcode or confirm the auto-generated passcode on both devices. You'll then get a Bluetooth authorization request.7. Tap Pair.8. When HTC One max receives a file transfer request notification, slide theNotifications panel down, tap the incoming file notification, and then tapAccept.9. When a file is transferred, a notification is displayed. Slide the Notifications paneldown, and then tap the relevant notification.When you open a received file, what happens next depends on the file type:§Media files and documents are usually opened directly in a compatible app. Forexample, if you open a music track, it starts playing in the Music app.§For a vCalendar file, choose the calendar where you want to save the event, andthen tap Import. The vCalendar is added to your Calendar events.§For a vCard contact file, you can choose to import one, several, or all of thosecontacts to your contacts list.140 Wireless sharingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-140.png)
![Sharing content with NFCWith built-in NFC (near field communication) on HTC One max, you can share contentto another NFC-capable mobile device in an instant. Beam webpages, photos, contactinformation, and more by holding HTC One max and the other device back to back.You can also use NFC for contactless payment. Availability of NFC paymentdepends on when your mobile operator launches this service. Contact your mobileoperator for details.Turning NFC on or off1. Go to Settings, and then under Wireless & networks, tap More.2. Select or clear the NFC option.141 Wireless sharingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-141.png)
![Beaming contentMake sure that both devices are unlocked and have NFC turned on. If the otherdevice has an Android Beam™ option, make sure it is also turned on.1. While viewing the content that you want to share, hold HTC One max and theother phone back to back. Make sure that the NFC area (shaded part) of HTC One max and the otherphone's NFC area are close to one another. Experiment by slightly moving thephones until a connection is made.2. Tap the screen.The shared content appears on the other screen. For some items that you've shared(such as contact information), additional instructions on how to save the item willappear on the receiving device.142 Wireless sharingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-142.png)
![Settings and securityChecking your phone's HTC Sense versionYou can view the HTC Sense version, as well as other information about your phone.1. Go to Settings, and then tap About.2. Tap Software information to view the HTC Sense version.Turning Airplane mode on or offWhen you enable Airplane (Flight) mode, all wireless radios on HTC One max areturned off, including the call function, data services, Bluetooth, and Wi-Fi.When you disable Airplane mode, the call function is turned back on and the previousstate of Bluetooth and Wi-Fi is restored.§You can manually turn Bluetooth and Wi-Fi back on after enabling Airplane mode.§If USB tethering is turned on, enabling Airplane mode turns it off. You need tomanually turn USB tethering on after you disable Airplane mode.Do any of the following to turn Airplane mode on or off:§Press and hold POWER, and then tap Airplane mode.§With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick settings. Tap theAirplane mode tile to turn airplane mode on or off.When enabled, the Airplane mode icon is displayed in the status bar.Turning Do not disturb mode on and offUse Do not disturb mode to reject calls, and silence audible alerts and notifications,but still want to have a data connection available.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Sound.2. Tap the Do not disturb On/Off switch to turn it on and off.3. Tap Do not disturb to set an auto turn off time or to allow the Clock app alarmand timer sounds to play when Do not disturb is on.The Do not disturb icon will appear in the notifications area of the status bar. Evenwhen Do not disturb mode is on, you'll still see notification icons in the status bar toalert you of missed calls, new messages, calendar events, alarms, and othernotifications.143 Settings and securityOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-143.png)
![Allowing incoming calls to bypass Do not disturb modeAdd important contacts to an exceptions list so that you can still receive their callseven when Do not disturb mode is on.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Sound.2. Tap Do not disturb.3. Select the checkbox to allow incoming calls from contacts on the exceptionslist.4. Tap Do not disturb exceptions and then tap .5. Choose whether to select contacts or groups to add to the exceptions list, or tomanually add a phone number that's not available in your contact info. To remove contacts or numbers from the exceptions list, tap > Remove contact.Turning automatic screen rotation offAutomatic rotation is not supported in all applications.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Display, gestures & buttons (or Display & buttons).2. Clear the Auto rotate screen option.Screen not rotating?Recalibrate the screen if you feel that the screen orientation does not respondproperly to the way you hold HTC One max.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Display, gestures & buttons (or Display &buttons).2. Tap G-Sensor calibration.3. Place HTC One max on a flat and level surface, and then tap Calibrate.4. After the recalibration process, tap OK.144 Settings and securityOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-144.png)
![Adjusting the time before the screen turns offAfter a period of inactivity, the screen turns off to conserve battery power. You canset the idle time before the screen turns off.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Display, gestures & buttons (or Display & buttons).2. Tap Sleep, and then tap the time before the screen turns off.Adjusting the screen brightness1. Go to Settings, and then tap Display, gestures & buttons (or Display & buttons).2. With the Automatic brightness option selected, drag the slider to set themaximum brightness level. This sets a limit on how bright the screen will bewhen Automatic brightness is selected.3. To set the brightness manually, clear the Automatic brightness option, and thendrag the brightness slider to the left to decrease or to the right to increase thescreen brightness.Touch sounds and vibrationSome people like the sound or vibration feedback they get when touching the screen,and some don't. You can turn on or off various types of touch sounds and vibration onHTC One max.§Touch tones when tapping the phone dial pad§Touch sounds when tapping onscreen items§Screen lock sounds§Pull-to-refresh sounds§Vibration when pressing hardware buttons§Touch sound and vibration when tapping the HTC Sense keyboardTurning touch sounds and vibration on and off1. Go to Settings, and then tap Sound.2. Under System, select the option you want to turn on or off.Turning off keyboard sounds and vibration1. Go to Settings, and then tap Language & keyboard.2. Tap HTC Sense Input3. Tap Sound feedback and then select None to turn off keyboard sounds.4. Clear the Vibration feedback option to turn off keyboard vibration.145 Settings and securityOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-145.png)
![Changing the display languageChanging the language adjusts the keyboard layout, date and time formatting, andmore.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Language & keyboard.2. Tap System language, and then choose the language you want to use.Accessibility settingsUse these settings when you’ve downloaded and installed an accessibility tool, such asa screen reader that provides voice feedback. You can turn accessibility functions orservices on or off.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Accessibility.2. Choose the settings you want.Magnifying your phone's screenIf you're visually impaired or would just like to get a closer view of what's on thescreen, use Magnification gestures to enlarge portions of your phone's screen.Turning Magnification gestures on or off1. Go to Settings, and then tap Accessibility.2. Tap Magnification gestures, and then tap the On/Off switch to turn it on or off.Using Magnification gesturesMake sure that Magnification gestures is turned on in Settings to use this feature.Triple-tap on any area of the screen that you want to magnify. You can:§Slide two fingers apart or together to adjust the magnification.§Drag two fingers to pan across the screen.To exit magnification mode, open another app or triple-tap the screen again.146 Settings and securityOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-146.png)
![Working with certificatesUse client and Certificate Authority (CA) digital certificates to enable HTC One max toaccess VPN or secured Wi-FI networks, and also to provide authentication to onlinesecure servers. You can get a certificate from your system administrator or downloadit from sites that require authentication.Some apps such as your browser or email client let you install certificates directly inthe app. See the app's help for details.Installing a digital certificateYou must set a lock screen PIN or password before installing a digital certificate.1. Save the certificate file in the root folder on HTC One max.2. Go to Settings, and then tap Security.3. Tap Install from storage.4. If you have more than one certificate in the root folder, select the certificate youwant to install.5. Enter a name for the certificate and tap OK.Protecting your SIM card with a PINAdd another layer of security for HTC One max by assigning a PIN (personalidentification number) to your SIM.Make sure you have the default SIM PIN provided by your mobile operator beforecontinuing.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Security.2. Tap Set up SIM card lock, then select Lock SIM card.3. Enter the default SIM card PIN, and then tap OK.4. To change the SIM card PIN, tap Change SIM PIN.147 Settings and securityOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-147.png)
![Restoring a SIM card that has been locked outIf you enter the wrong PIN more times than the maximum number of attemptsallowed, your SIM card will become “PUK-locked.”You need a PUK code to restore access to HTC One max. Contact your mobileoperator for this code.1. On the Phone dialer screen, enter the PUK code, and then tap Next.2. Enter the new PIN you want to use, and then tap Next.3. Enter the new PIN again, and then tap OK.Showing or hiding notifications on the lockscreenChoose the types of notifications to show or hide on the lock screen.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Security.2. Under Lock screen, tap Notification settings.3. Choose whether to show or hide notifications such as missed calls, textmessages, upcoming calendar events, and more.Protecting HTC One max with a screen lockHelp protect your personal information and help prevent others from usingHTC One max without your permission.Choose to set a screen lock pattern, numeric PIN, or other means of securing yourphone. You'll be asked to unlock the screen every time HTC One max is turned on orwhen it’s idle for a certain period of time.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Security.2. Tap Screen lock.3. Select a screen lock option and set up the screen lock.4. Tap Lock phone after, then specify the idle time before the screen is locked. You can also clear Make pattern visible or Make passwords visible if you don’t wantyour screen lock to display as you enter it onscreen.148 Settings and securityOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-148.png)
![Forgot your screen lock pattern?If you’ve forgotten your screen lock pattern, you have up to five attempts totry and unlock HTC One max.If this fails, you can unlock HTC One max by entering your Google Accountuser name and password.1. On the unlock screen, enter your lock pattern.2. After the fifth attempt, when you’re asked to wait for 30 seconds, tapOK.3. If the display goes off, press the POWER button to turn the display backon, and then unlock the screen.4. Tap the Forgot pattern? button when it appears.5. Enter your Google Account name and password, and then tap Sign in.You’ll then be asked to create a new screen lock pattern. If you nolonger want to do so, tap None or press .Securing HTC One max with face unlockSet up face unlock if you want to unlock HTC One max by simply looking at it.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Security.2. Tap Screen lock > Face Unlock.3. Tap Set it up and follow the onscreen instructions.4. Choose a backup unlock method to use in case the phone doesn't recognizeyou.5. Tap Lock phone after, and then specify the idle time before the screen is locked.To help make face unlock more reliable and secure, you can:§Tap Improve face matching to train HTC One max to recognize your face indifferent situations, such as when you're wearing glasses or sporting a beard.§Select the Liveness check option to require eye blinking when unlocking thescreen.149 Settings and securityOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-149.png)
![Bypassing the lock screenIf you've set a screen lock for HTC One max, you can just skip the lock screen and gostraight to the security screen for unlocking HTC One max.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Security.2. Select the Bypass lock screen on wake option.150 Settings and securityOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-150.png)
![Trademarks and copyrights©2013 HTC Corporation. All Rights Reserved.HTC, the HTC logo, HTC One, HTC BlinkFeed, HTC Sense, and HTC Zoe aretrademarks or service marks of HTC Corporation.Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Android Market, Google Apps,Google Calendar, Google Checkout, Google Earth, Google Latitude, Google Maps,Google Play, Google Talk, Google Wallet, Gmail, Picasa, and YouTube are trademarksof Google Inc.Microsoft, Windows, ActiveSync, Excel, Outlook, PowerPoint, Windows Media, andWindows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of MicrosoftCorporation in the United States and/or other countries.The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by BluetoothSIG, Inc.Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.LTE is a trademark of European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI).Facebook is a trademark of Facebook, Inc.Twitter is a trademark of Twitter, Inc., and is used under license.FLICKR and the FLICKR Dots logo are the trademarks and/or registered trademarksof Yahoo! Inc.DLNA and the DLNA disc logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of DigitalLiving Network Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.iPhone, iCal, iTunes, and Mac are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.Polaris Office is a trademark of Infraware, Inc.All other company, product and service names mentioned herein are trademarks,registered trademarks or service marks of their respective owners. Not all marks listednecessarily appear in this User Guide.The HTC Sync Manager software can be used with materials that you own or arelawfully authorized to use and/or duplicate. Unauthorized use and/or duplication ofcopyrighted material may be a violation of copyright law in the United States and/orother countries/regions. Violation of U.S. and international copyright laws may subjectyou to significant civil and/or criminal penalties. HTC Corporation shall not be heldresponsible for any damages or losses (direct or indirect) that you may incur as aresult of using this software.Screen images contained herein are simulated. HTC shall not be liable for technical oreditorial errors or omissions contained herein, nor for incidental or consequentialdamages resulting from furnishing this material. The information is provided “as is”without warranty of any kind and is subject to change without notice. HTC also151 Trademarks and copyrightsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-151.png)
![reserves the right to revise the content of this document at any time without priornotice.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by anymeans, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording or storing in aretrieval system, or translated into any language in any form without prior writtenpermission of HTC.152 Trademarks and copyrightsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-152.png)
![IndexAAirplane mode 143Alarms- setting 119Android BeamSee NFCAndroid MarketSee Google PlayApps- arranging 50- grouping into a folder 51- hiding or unhiding 52- icons on Home screen 49- installing 117, 118- non-Google Play apps 118- on All Apps screen 50- on Home screen 49- restoring 118- uninstalling 118- updating 20BBackup- restoring backed up apps 118Battery- charging 12- checking usage 37- saving battery power 37Bluetooth- connecting a Bluetooth headset 138- received file location 139- receiving information 140Browser- bookmarks 75- history 76, 77- incognito tab 77- Reading list or Watch list 74- syncing with Google Chrome 76- tabs 74- using 73- viewing desktop version 73Burst mode 43CCalendar- creating an event 121- dual time zone 120- meeting conflicts 121- meeting invitations 122- reminders 123- sending quick response 123- views 120Call history 59Camera- basics 41, 42- continuous shooting 43- effects 42- flash 42- front camera 41- HDR 45- recording a video 42- scenes 44- self portrait 44- slow motion 46- standby 41- sweep panorama 45- taking a photo 42- taking photo while recording 43- video resolution 42- zooming 41Capture screen 29Car- about 113- handling calls 115- HTC Car Kit 113- Internet radio 114- navigation 115- playing music 114- voice commands 113Change phone language 146Clock- alarm 119- setting date and time 119153 IndexOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-153.png)
![Conference call 59Contacts- adding 96- copying contacts 17, 97- copying from SIM card 97- importing contacts 17, 97, 98- transferring contacts 17, 97Continuous shooting 43Copying files- files to computer, phone storage, orstorage card 90Copying- text 32DData connection- access point names (APN) 128- data roaming 129- sharing 135- turning on or off 128- usage 129Data transfer- from Android phone 15- from iPhone and other phones 16- transferring contacts 17Display- G-sensor 144- changing the time before the screenturns off 145- recalibrating G-sensor 144- screen brightness 145- screen rotation 144- Sleep mode 26DLNA 89DrivingSee CarEElectronic program guide- setting up 82, 85EmailSee MailEPGSee Electronic program guideExchange ActiveSync- flagging an email 107- meeting request 107- Out of office 107- sending a meeting request 107expanded storage 90FFace unlock 149Files- copying to computer, phone storage,or storage card 90Finger gestures 21Fingerprint- about 18- adding, removing, or editing 19- scrolling with 19FirmwareSee Software updateFM Radio- using 124Folder- grouping apps 51- grouping bookmarks 75- removing items 52- renaming 51FOTASee Software updateGGestures- motion gestures 25- touch gestures 21Gmail 102Google Maps 109Google Now- setting up 71- turning off 72Google Play- installing apps 117- refund 118Google Voice Search 70GPS (Global Positioning System)See Location settingsGroup messaging 64HHands free 138HDMI 88HDR 45154 IndexOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-154.png)
![HeadphonesSee BluetoothHome screen- widgets 48- adding, removing, or arrangingwidget panels 52- apps 49- changing your main Home screen 53- folder 51- launch bar 48- rearranging widgets and icons 50- removing widgets and icons 50- shortcuts 49- wallpaper 47HotspotSee Wireless routerHTC CarSee CarHTC Clock- setting an alarm 119HTC Media Link HD 88HTC Sense version 143HTC Zoe 44IIdle screenSee Lock screenIncognito modeSee Browser, incognito tabInternet- browsing 73- connections 128Internet connection- data connection 128- VPN 132- Wi-Fi 130- wireless router 134KKeyboard- dictionary 35- entering text 33- entering text by speaking 36- HTC Sense keyboard 33- layout 34- multi-language keyboard 34- predictive text 34- shortcuts 35- speech recognition 36Kid mode- about 125- choosing apps 125- closing 125LLanguage- system language 146Location settings 109Lock screen- answering a call 57- dismissing an alarm 27- opening an app 27- rejecting a call 57- unlocking 27Low battery 37Low storage 90MMail- attachments 105- carbon copy, blind copy (cc,bcc) 105- deleting 106- draft 105- replying 105- searching 106- sending 105- sorting 106Mail folders- moving email messages 106Making calls- calling 54- calling a number in a Calendarevent 56- calling a number in a message 56- calling a number in an email 56Maps- Google Maps 109MarketSee Google PlayMeeting request 107Messages- block box 68- copying to the SIM card 69- deleting a conversation 69155 IndexOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-155.png)
![- draft message 62, 65- forwarding 66- group SMS 64- locking 69- replying 65- saving as task 66- secure box 67- sending 62microSD card 11MMSSee Multimedia messageMobile data 128Multimedia message- attachment 62- group MMS 64- sending 62Music- adding a song to a queue 80- album covers 80- artist photos 80- listening 78- lyrics 81- playing music from the Lockscreen 78- playlist 79- setting a song as ringtone 80- SoundHound 82NNavigationSee CarNFC (Near Field Communication) 141Notifications- panel 31PPair a Bluetooth headset 138Panorama 45Panoramic photo 45People- adding a new contact 96- contact groups 100- contact link suggestions 98- copying contacts 17, 97, 98- editing contacts 97- filtering your contacts 94- groups 100- importing contacts 17, 97- merging contact information 98- personal profile 95- sending contact information 99- transferring contacts 17, 97Phone calls- blocking a call 60- call history 59- calling 54- calling a number in a Calendarevent 56- calling a number in a message 56- calling a number in an email 56- conference call 59- emergency call 56- extension number 55- missed calls 55- muting the microphone 58- putting a call on hold 58- receiving calls 57- Smart Dial 54- speakerphone 58- speed dial 55Phone information 143Phone settingsSee SettingsPhone updates 20Photos- transferring from computer 17Power- charging the battery 12- checking battery usage 37- saving power 37- sleep mode 26Print screenSee Capture screenPrinting 136PUK (PIN Unblock Key) 148QQuick settings 28RRadioSee FM RadioReading list 74Recording your voice 127Remote control 85156 IndexOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-156.png)
![Ring volume- lowering ring volumeautomatically 60- making your phone ring louder 60- Pocket mode 60Ringtone- editing 81- setting song as ringtone 80RouterSee Wireless routerSScenes- in Camera app 44Screen- adjusting brightness 145- capture 29- changing the time before the screenturns off 145- idle screen 27- recalibrating G-sensor 144- rotation 144- Sleep mode settings 145Screen lock 148Screen shotSee Capture screenSD card 11Search- searching phone and Web 70- voice search 70Security- fingerprint 18- protecting phone with screenlock 148- protecting SIM card with PIN 147- security certificates 132Sense TV- about 82- checking on-demand video 85- electronic program guide (EPG) 83- scheduling 84- setting up 82Settings- About 143- Accessibility 146- display language 146- Storage 90Setup- contacts from old phone 17- initial setup 14- photos, music, videos from oldphone 17Sharing- events 122- text 32- TV 88Shortcuts 27SIM card- copying messages to 69- inserting 10- removing 11- SIM PIN 147Sleep mode 26Slideshow- MMS 63Slow motion video 46Smart network sharing 135, 136SMSSee MessagesSoftware update 20Sound- lowering ring volumeautomatically 60- Pocket mode 60- ringtone, notifications, and alarm 53- switching profiles 60Speakerphone 58Speed dial 55Storage 90Sweep panorama 45TTasks- about 126- creating a task 126- managing 126- managing lists 127TetheringSee USB TetheringText message 62TVSee Sense TV157 IndexOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-157.png)
![UUpgradeSee Software updateUSB Tethering 135VVideoPic 43Videos- recording 42- taking photo while recording 43- transferring from computer 17Voice input 36Voice Recorder 127Voice search 70VPN- adding a connection 133- connecting 133- disconnecting 133WWallpaper- changing 47Watch list 74Weather- checking weather 119Wi-Fi- connecting to another network 132- connecting via WPS 131- turning on 130Widgets- adding 48- changing settings 49- rearranging 50- removing 50- resizing 49Wireless display 88Wireless router 134Word prediction- bilingual prediction 35YYouTube- finding videos of songs 82- preloading 124- watching 123158 IndexOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094305-Page-158.png)
User Manual 1
![Your HTC One maxUser guideOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-1.png)
![ContentsUnboxingHTC One max 7Back cover 8micro SIM card 10Storage card 11Charging the battery 12Switching the power on or off 12Want some quick guidance on your phone? 13Setting up your phoneSetting up your new phone for the first time 14Transferring content from an Android phone 15Transferring contacts from your old phone through Bluetooth 16Getting contacts and other content into HTC One max 17Transferring photos, videos, and music between your phone and computer 17Getting to know your settings 18About the Fingerprint sensor 18Updating your phone's software 20Your first week with your new phoneBasics 21Notifications 29Working with text 32Battery 37CameraCamera basics 41Taking a photo 42Recording video 42Taking continuous camera shots 43Camera scenes 44Improving portrait shots 44Taking a self portrait 44Taking HTC Zoe photos 44What is HTC Zoe? 45Taking a panoramic photo 45Using HDR 45Recording videos in slow motion 462 ContentsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-2.png)
![PersonalizingMaking HTC One max truly yours 47Changing your wallpaper 47Personalizing the launch bar 48Adding a widget to your Home screen 48Adding apps and other shortcuts on your Home screen 49Rearranging or removing widgets and icons on your Home screen 50Arranging apps on the All Apps screen 50Grouping apps into a folder 51Hiding or unhiding apps 52Adding, removing, or arranging widget panels 52Changing your main Home screen 53Changing the sounds for your ringtone, notifications, and alarm 53Rearranging application tabs 53Phone callsMaking a call with Smart dial 54Dialing an extension number 55Returning a missed call 55Using Speed dial 55Calling a phone number in a text message 56Calling a phone number in an email 56Calling a phone number in a Calendar event 56Making an emergency call 56Receiving calls 57What can I do during a call? 58Setting up a conference call 59Checking calls in the Call History 59Changing ringtone settings 60Home dialing 61MessagesSending a text message (SMS) 62Sending a multimedia message (MMS) 62Sending a group message 64Resuming a draft message 65Replying to a message 65Saving a text message in the Tasks app 66Forwarding a message 66Viewing and saving an attachment from a multimedia message 67Moving messages to the secure box 67Blocking unwanted messages 68WAP push messages 68Copying a text message to your micro SIM card 69Deleting messages and conversations 69Search and web browserSearching HTC One max and the Web 70Getting instant information with Google Now 71Browsing the Web 73Bookmarking a webpage 753 ContentsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-3.png)
![Using your browsing history 76Clearing your browsing history 77EntertainmentMusic 78TV 82Wireless media 88StorageTypes of storage 90Copying files to or from HTC One max 90Making more storage space 91Encrypting data on HTC One max 92PeopleYour contacts list 94Setting up your profile 95Adding a new contact 96Editing a contact’s information 97Getting in touch with a contact 97Importing or copying contacts 97Merging contact information 98Sending contact information 99Contact groups 100EmailGmail 102Mail 104Travel and mapsLocation settings 109Google Maps 109HTC Car 113Google Play and other appsGetting apps 117Essential apps 119Fun apps 123Productivity apps 126Internet connectionsData connection 128Managing your data usage 129Wi-Fi 130Connecting to a virtual private network (VPN) 132Using HTC One max as a wireless router 134Sharing your phone's Internet connection by USB tethering 135Connecting to the Internet through a computer 1364 ContentsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-4.png)
![Wi-Fi printing 136Wireless sharingConnecting a Bluetooth headset 138Unpairing from a Bluetooth device 139Where sent information is saved 139Receiving files using Bluetooth 140Sharing content with NFC 141Settings and securityChecking your phone's HTC Sense version 143Turning Airplane mode on or off 143Turning Do not disturb mode on and off 143Turning automatic screen rotation off 144Adjusting the time before the screen turns off 145Adjusting the screen brightness 145Touch sounds and vibration 145Changing the display language 146Accessibility settings 146Magnifying your phone's screen 146Working with certificates 147Protecting your SIM card with a PIN 147Showing or hiding notifications on the lock screen 148Protecting HTC One max with a screen lock 148Securing HTC One max with face unlock 149Bypassing the lock screen 150Trademarks and copyrightsIndex5 ContentsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-5.png)
![Conventions used in this guideIn this user guide, we use the following symbols to indicate useful and importantinformation:This is a note. A note often gives additional information, such as what happenswhen you choose to do or not to do a certain action. A note also providesinformation that may only be applicable to some situations.This is a tip. A tip gives you an alternative way to do a particular step or procedure,or lets you know of an option that you may find helpful.This indicates important information that you need in order to accomplish a certaintask or to get a feature to work properly.This provides safety precaution information, that is, information that you need to becareful about to prevent potential problems.6 Conventions used in this guideOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-6.png)
![UnboxingHTC One maxFront panel1. BACK2. USB connector3. HOME4. Dual speakers5. POWER6. VOLUME7. Front camera8. 3.5mm headset jack9. IR SENSOR10. Proximity sensor11. Notification LED12. Back cover lock§HTC One max is available in either a 3G or LTE version, depending on your regionand mobile operator. You need an LTE plan to use your operator's 4G/LTEnetwork for voice calls and data services. Check with your operator for details.§If you want to use a screen protector, please don’t cover and block the proximitysensor. Purchase a screen protector designed for HTC One max.7 UnboxingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-7.png)
![Back panel1. LED flash2. Main camera3. Fingerprint sensor4. Back coverBack coverRemoving the back cover1. Securely hold HTC One max facing down.2. Slide the back cover lock down, and then lift the back cover from the side. 8 UnboxingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-8.png)
![Replacing the back cover1. Align the back cover to the left side of the card slot compartment, and theninsert the tabs into the slots on the left. 2. Close the back cover and press starting from the top to the bottom. Make surethat there are no gaps on any side. 3. Press again on the right side to secure the cover into place, and then slide thelock all the way to the closed position. 9 UnboxingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-9.png)
![micro SIM cardHTC One max uses a micro SIM card. The micro SIM card contains your phonenumber, service details, and memory for storing phonebook contacts and/or textmessages.Inserting the micro SIM cardUse a standard micro SIM only. Inserting a smaller size SIM (such as nano SIM withan adapter or a modified SIM) may cause the card to not fit properly or damage thecard slot.1. Take the back cover off.2. With the micro SIM card’s gold contacts facing down and its cut-off cornerfacing in, insert the micro SIM card all the way into the micro SIM card slot. 3. Push the micro SIM card in until it clicks into place.10 UnboxingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-10.png)
![Removing the micro SIM cardMake sure to switch off HTC One max before removing your micro SIM card.1. Take the back cover off.2. Push the micro SIM card in to eject it from its slot, and remove it.Storage cardUse a storage card to store your photos, videos, and music.Inserting the storage card1. Take the back cover off.2. Insert the microSD™ card into the storage card slot with its gold contacts facingdown and push it into place. Unmounting the storage cardWhen you need to remove the storage card while HTC One max is on, unmount thestorage card first to prevent corrupting or damaging the files in the storage card.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Storage.2. Tap Unmount SD card.Removing the storage card1. Take the back cover off.2. Slide the storage card out from its slot.11 UnboxingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-11.png)
![Charging the batteryBefore you turn on and start using HTC One max, it is recommended that you chargethe battery.Use only the adapter and the USB cable that came with HTC One max to chargethe battery. When the battery power is too low, make sure to use the poweradapter to charge, not the USB cable connection with your computer.1. Insert the small end of the USB cable into the USB connector. 2. Insert the other end of the USB cable into the power adapter.3. Plug in the power adapter to an electrical outlet to start charging the battery.§As a safety precaution, the battery may stop charging to avoid overheating.§When you're using the Internet and charging the battery, HTC One max maybecome warmer. This is normal.§To conserve energy, unplug the power adapter from the electrical outlet after youfinish charging.Switching the power on or offSwitching the power onPress the POWER button. When you turn on HTC One max for the first time, you’ll need to set it up.12 UnboxingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-12.png)
![Switching the power off1. If the display is off, press the POWER button to turn it back on. If your screen isprotected with a lock screen, you need to unlock it.2. Press and hold the POWER button for a few seconds.3. Tap Power off on the options menu.Want some quick guidance on your phone?Exploring HTC One maxTips & Help lets you get the most out of HTC One max in seconds.§Ever have the feeling that you're not getting the most out of your phone?Browse through the friendly walkthroughs on Tips & Help to learn how. Thetopics range from intro to advanced and the Tips & Help feed on the Homescreen even recommends topics that you might like.§Need to know how to do something right away? Just type in some keywordsand get clear, up-to-date answers right on HTC One max.To open Tips & Help from the Home screen, tap > Tips & Help.If you haven't downloaded Tips & Help content yet, or if there's updated contentavailable, just tap the download link to get it.To change the sync settings of Tips & Help, tap > Update settings.Searching Tips & Help1. In Tips & Help, tap , and then enter the words you want to search for.2. Tap a search result to jump straight to that item.13 UnboxingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-13.png)
![Setting up your phoneSetting up your new phone for the first timeWhen you switch on your new phone for the first time, you’ll be asked to set it up.Walk through the on-device setup to choose your Internet connection, select how youwant to set up your new phone, and more.§Select Set up from scratch to set up your accounts and personalize your newphone from your computer using the HTC Get Started service. Your phone shows you the URL of the HTC Get Started site and a pair code. Onyour computer's web browser, just go to the URL and enter the pair code tostart your web setup. You need an HTC Account to save your accounts andsettings on the Web and download them to your phone.§If you already finished the HTC Get Started setup before turning on your newphone, just download your web setup. Choose to import content, and thenselect Apply HTC Get Started setup.§If you have content from an old phone, you can choose to do a direct phone-to-phone transfer.§To make it easier for you to back up and restore content from HTC One max toanother HTC phone in the future, select Back up phone daily.§To find out more about HTC Get Started and HTC Account, see the Help and FAQon the HTC Get Started site (www.htcsense.com/help/).§If you transferred content such as wallpaper and ringtone from an old phone, usingHTC Get Started to personalize and download the same content types from theWeb will change your settings on your new phone.§Some features that need to connect to the Internet such as location-basedservices and auto-sync of your online accounts may incur extra data fees. To avoidincurring data fees, disable these features under Settings.14 Setting up your phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-14.png)
![Transferring content from an Android phoneOn your old Android™ phone, download the HTC Transfer Tool and use it to transferyour content to your new HTC phone. The types of locally stored content on your oldphone that the tool can transfer include contacts, messages, calendar events, webbookmarks, music, photos, and videos. Some settings can also be transferred.§You need Android version 2.2 or later to use the HTC Transfer Tool on your oldphone.§If your old phone has Android version 2.1 or an earlier version, you need to useBluetooth® transfer. For details, see Transferring contacts from your old phonethrough Bluetooth on page 16.1. Do one of the following:§If you're setting up your new HTC phone for the first time, choose totransfer content, and then select Transfer from old phone on the Set upphone screen.§Go to Settings, and then tap Get content from another phone.2. Choose whether to transfer from an old HTC Android phone or other Androidphone.3. Tap Full transfer.4. Follow the steps shown on your new phone to download the HTC Transfer Toolfrom Google Play™ to your old phone, install it, and open the tool.5. When you see a PIN on your old phone, make sure the same PIN also appearson your new phone before you continue. If the PIN code doesn't appear, this may mean that your old phone is unable toconnect to your new phone. If this happens, tap Try another transfer method onyour new phone to use Bluetooth for transferring contacts from your old phone.15 Setting up your phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-15.png)
![6. On your old phone, choose the types of content you want to transfer, and thentap Transfer.7. Wait for the transfer to finish.8. Tap Done on both phones.Transferring contacts from your old phonethrough BluetoothUse Bluetooth to transfer contacts from an iPhone®, a phone that has Android version2.1 (or earlier version), or other types of phones. Depending on the capabilities of yourold phone, you may be able to transfer not only contacts but also other data such ascalendar events and text messages to your new HTC phone.Use HTC Sync Manager to transfer more types of content from an iPhone.1. Do one of the following:§If you're setting up your new phone for the first time, choose to transfercontent, and then select Transfer from old phone on the Set up phonescreen.§Go to Settings, and then tap Get content from another phone.2. Choose whether to transfer from an Android phone, iPhone, or other phonetypes. If you chose to transfer from an Android phone, tap Quick transfer.3. Choose your old phone's name and model.4. On your old phone, turn Bluetooth on and set it to discoverable mode.5. Follow the onscreen instructions on your old and new phones to pair them andstart the data transfer.16 Setting up your phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-16.png)
![Getting contacts and other content intoHTC One maxAside from the HTC Transfer Tool, there are other ways you can add contacts andother content to HTC One max.Sync with yourcomputerUse HTC Sync Manager to sync contacts, documents, playlists,and more between HTC One max and your computer running aWindows® or Mac OS® operating system.You can also use it to transfer contacts, messages, and othercontent from an iPhone to your computer, and then to yourHTC One max.Google® Account Google contacts are imported to HTC One max after you sign into your Google Account. You can also create more Googlecontacts right from HTC One max.Social networkaccountsLog in to your favorite social networks to sync contactinformation from them.Microsoft®ExchangeActiveSync®HTC One max syncs your work contacts from the MicrosoftExchange ActiveSync Server in your workplace.Phone contacts You can create contacts locally on HTC One max, if you don'tprefer to store them on your online accounts.SIM card Copy all your SIM contacts to HTC One max.Transferring photos, videos, and musicbetween your phone and computerThere are two ways you can transfer your media from or to your computer.§Connect HTC One max to your computer. Your computer will recognize it justlike any removable USB drive, and you can copy your media between them.§Download and use the HTC Sync Manager software on your computer. You canset it up to automatically get music, photos, and videos off HTC One max toyour computer. You can also sync playlists from your computer to the phone.If you have an iPhone, you can even connect it and transfer the camera roll(photos and videos) to your computer. Then reconnect HTC One max and copythem over.Tired of keeping copies of your media in several places? Use online storage servicesto put your media in one place so you can manage them anywhere — on yourcomputer, HTC One max, and other mobile devices.Go to Settings, and then tap Accounts & sync > to check first what online storageaccounts are available on HTC One max and sign in to the one you want to use. Usethe Gallery app to access media in your online storage.17 Setting up your phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-17.png)
![Getting to know your settingsWant to change the ringtone, set up a Wi-Fi® connection, or add your accounts? Dothis and more in Settings.1. Open Settings either from the Quick settings panel or the All Apps screen.§With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick settings,and then tap .§From the Home screen, tap to switch to the All Apps screen, and thentap Settings.2. Here are some of the basic settings you can change: §Tap the On/Off switch next to an item such as Wi-Fi to turn it on or off. Tapthe item itself to configure its settings.§Tap Sound to set a ringtone, choose a sound profile, and configureincoming call sound settings.§Tap Personalize to change the Home screen wallpaper, lock screen style,and more.§Tap Accounts & sync to add and sign in to your different accounts, such asemail, social networks, and more.§Tap Security to help secure HTC One max, for example with a screen lock.About the Fingerprint sensorYou can add an extra layer of security, quickly open apps, and navigate HTC One maxusing your fingerprint. You can add up to three fingerprints to use for unlocking thephone and launching apps.When setting up and using the fingerprint sensor, follow these tips:§Move your hand as you swipe the finger across the sensor, to avoid curling orpointing your finger.§Swipe vertically, not horizontally across the sensor.§Make sure your finger is dry and clean.§Don't swipe too quickly or slowly.§Make sure you're not pressing too hard (or lightly).Adding a fingerprintIf you didn't add your fingerprint when you first set up HTC One max, you can add itin Settings.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Fingerprint.2. Tap Continue.3. Choose which finger you want to use.18 Setting up your phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-18.png)
![4. Press your finger pad flat above the fingerprint sensor and then swipe yourfinger down the sensor. You'll be prompted to swipe it three more times. 5. After you've successfully recorded your fingerprint, tap Continue.6. Enter and confirm a backup password to be used in the event the phone doesn'trecognize your fingerprint.7. If you want to launch an app automatically after unlocking your phone, tap OKand choose the app you want.To change the backup password in the future, go to Settings and tap Fingerprint >Change backup password.Adding, removing, or editing fingerprintsYou can add more fingerprints to use, change fingerprint settings, and removefingerprints.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Fingerprint.2. Under Edit fingerprint, do either of the following:§Tap a recorded fingerprint, and then choose whether to remove it or selectan app to launch.§Tap Learn new fingerprint to add new fingerprints.Scrolling with the fingerprint sensorYou can use the fingerprint sensor to scroll up and down in apps such as Internet,Mail, and Messages. You don't need to have added a fingerprint to be able to use thefingerprint sensor to scroll.§Swipe up on the sensor to scroll up the screen.§Swipe down on the sensor to scroll down the screen.19 Setting up your phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-19.png)
![Updating your phone's softwareHTC One max can check and notify you if there’s a new update available. You can alsochoose to automatically download updates or manually check if there's an availableupdate.Installing a software updateWhen Internet connection is on and there's a new software update available, theupdate notification icon appears in the status bar.1. Slide the Notifications panel open, and then tap the system update notification.2. If you don't want to download the update using your data connection, selectUpdate over Wi-Fi only.3. Tap Download.4. When download is complete, select Install now, and then tap OK.After updating, HTC One max will restart.Installing an application updateWhen Internet connection is on and there's an available update for your HTC ormobile operator apps, the update notification icon appears in the status bar.1. Slide the Notifications panel open, and then tap the update notification. The Updates screen opens with the list of application updates to be installed.2. Tap an item to view its details, and then tap .3. When you're done reviewing the updates, tap Install. You'll be asked to restartHTC One max if needed.Enabling automatic updatesYou can choose to automatically download and install software updates for HTC ormobile operator apps. System software updates will also be automaticallydownloaded, but you need to confirm when to install the updates.1. Go to Settings, and then tap About.2. Tap Software updates > Auto update.Checking for updates manually1. Go to Settings, and then tap About.2. Tap Software updates. HTC One max checks if updates are available.If you don't have Internet connection, you'll be prompted to turn on mobile data orconnect to a Wi-Fi network. Once connected, tap Check now to check for updates.20 Setting up your phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-20.png)
![Your first week with yournew phoneBasicsTouch gesturesUse touch gestures to get around the Home screen, open apps, scroll through lists,and more.Tap§Tap the screen with your finger when you want to selectonscreen items such as application and settings icons, orpress onscreen buttons.§After you've scrolled down a long list or screen (in apps suchas Mail and People), tap the status bar to jump straight tothe top of your screen.Press and holdTo open the available options for an item (for example, acontact or link in a webpage), just press and hold the item.21 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-21.png)
![Swipe or slideQuickly swipe your finger vertically or horizontally across thescreen to go to other Home pages, scroll through documents,and more.DragPress and hold your finger with some pressure before you startto drag. While dragging, don't release your finger until youhave reached the target position.FlickFlicking the screen is similar to swiping, except thatyou need to swipe your finger in light, quickerstrokes, such as when moving right and left on theHome screen, or flicking through a contacts ormessage list.22 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-22.png)
![Press and flickOn the Home screen, you can easily move a widget oricon from one screen to another.Press and hold the widget or icon with one finger, andflick the screen to the new location with another finger.Slide with two fingersIn some apps, like Gallery, Messages, Mail,or the web browser, slide two fingersapart to zoom in when viewing a pictureor text.Slide two fingers together to zoom out of the picture ortext.23 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-23.png)
![Two-finger swipe§Swipe down from the status bar using two fingers to accessQuick settings.§In some apps that have sorting, like Mail or People, swipe up ordown using two fingers to scroll the screen. The screen displaysthe sorting order, and you can easily scroll to the informationyou want.Three-finger swipe§Swipe up using three fingers to open the Mediaoutput screen. Then choose where to share contentsuch as photos, videos, and music fromHTC One max.§Swipe down to disconnect from Media output.HTC gestures is enabled by default, which makes the three-finger gesture workonly when sharing content or using HTC apps.Three-finger tapWhile using the HTC Car app, tap the screen with three fingersto activate the voice command mode.24 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-24.png)
![Can't use multi-finger gestures in your apps?That's because HTC gestures is enabled by default. This makes the three-finger gesture exclusive for sharing content or for use with HTC apps. Youwon't be able to use multi-finger gestures (gestures that use three fingers ormore) for other purposes.To use multi-finger gestures in games or musical instrument apps, clear theHTC gestures option in Settings > Display, gestures & buttons (or Display &buttons).Motion gesturesUse motion gestures to mute HTC One max, lower the ringtone volume, and more.Flip to silenceWhen a call comes in you can turnHTC One max over to mute it.Pick up to lower volumeIn a business meeting or restaurant, pickHTC One max up when a call comes in tolower the ringtone volume.25 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-25.png)
![Set volume to automatically rise while in your pocket or bagOn a noisy street and can't hear HTC One max ringing inyour bag?You can set HTC One max to recognize when it's in yourbag or pocket and raise the ringtone volume so that youcan hear it in noisy environments.Rotate HTC One max for a better viewFor many screens, you canautomatically change the screenorientation from portrait tolandscape by turningHTC One max sideways.When entering text, you can turnHTC One max sideways to bringup a bigger keyboard.Sleep modeSleep mode saves battery power by putting HTC One max into a low power statewhile the display is off. It also stops accidental button presses when HTC One max isin your bag.Switching to Sleep modeBriefly press the POWER button to turn off the display and switch to Sleep mode.HTC One max also automatically goes into Sleep mode when it’s left idle for a while.You can change the time before HTC One max sleeps in the Display, gestures &buttons (or Display & buttons) settings.Waking up from Sleep modeTo wake HTC One max up manually, press the POWER button. If your screen isprotected with a lock screen, you need to unlock it.HTC One max automatically wakes up when you have an incoming call.26 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-26.png)
![Unlocking the screenDrag the lock icon or clock up. If you've set up a screen lock, you'll be asked to provide your credentials beforeHTC One max unlocks.If you've set an event reminder or an alarm, you can snooze or dismiss the event oralarm right from the lock screen. Just drag or up.Opening an app§Tap an app on the launch bar at the bottom of the Home screen.§To see the All Apps screen, tap . Then tap the app you want to use.§In the All Apps screen, pull down to show the hidden menu bar. Then tap and enter the name of the app you're looking for.Opening an app or folder from the lock screen§On the lock screen, drag an app or folder icon up to unlock the screen anddirectly go to the app or folder. The shortcuts on the lock screen are the same ones on your Home screen's launchbar. To change the lock screen shortcuts, replace the apps or folders on the launchbar.§When there's a notification or info shown on the lock screen such as a missedcall or new message, you can drag it up to directly go to its app.If you've set up a screen lock, you'll be asked to provide your credentials first beforeHTC One max opens the app or folder.27 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-27.png)
![Switching between recently opened appsWhen you're multitasking and using different apps on HTC One max, you can easilyswitch between the apps you've recently opened.Double-tap to see recently-opened apps. §To switch back to an app, just tap it.§To remove an app from the list, drag it up.Refreshing contentIn some apps, you can easily refresh content that's synced or downloaded from theWeb with a simple finger gesture.1. While viewing content such as weather, stocks, or Mail inbox, scroll to the top ofthe screen.2. Pull down with your finger, and then release to refresh.Using Quick SettingsTap the tiles in Quick Settings to easily turn on Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and more. You'll alsofind a few shortcuts, such as for viewing your profile in the People app.With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.You can also tap to switch to Quick Settings from the Notifications panel.28 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-28.png)
![Customizing Quick SettingsAside from the default tiles, there are several other tiles available in Quick Settings.1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. Tap and do one of the following:§In the Quick Settings list, press and hold next to the item you want tomove and drag it to rearrange the list.§Under Hidden items, press and hold and drag it up to make it availablein Quick Settings.There is a limit to the number of tiles that can be shown in Quick Settings. You mayneed to remove an existing item to make space for another one. To remove anitem, drag it below Hidden items.Miss having a Menu button?You can set the Home button to open the Menu.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Display, gestures & buttons (or Display &buttons).2. Tap Home and select how you want to open the Menu, which is to pressand hold the button.Capturing your phone's screenWant to show off your high game score or write a blog post about HTC One maxfeatures? It's easy to take a picture of the screen and share it from Gallery.Press and hold POWER and VOLUME DOWN at the same time. The image is saved in the Screenshots album in Gallery.You can also share the image when see in the status bar. Open theNotifications panel and tap under the screenshot notification. If you don't see, slide two fingers apart on the screenshot notification.NotificationsNotification LED29 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-29.png)
![The notification LED shows a:§Solid green light when HTC One max is connected to the power adapter or acomputer and the battery is fully charged.§Flashing green light when you have a pending notification.§Solid orange light when the battery is being charged.§Flashing orange light when the battery level reaches very low.30 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-30.png)
![Notifications panelNotification icons inform you of new messages, calendar events, alarms, and activitiesin progress such as files downloading.When you see notification icons, open the Notifications panel to check out details ofthe notifications that you've received.1. To open the Notifications panel, slide down from the top of the screen. If you have several notifications, scroll down the screen to see them all.To quickly access the Notifications panel from Quick settings, tap .2. On the Notifications panel:§You can expand certain notifications to see more information, such as emailpreviews and calendar events. Slide two fingers apart to expand anotification. To collapse it, slide two fingers together.§You'll see icons in some notifications that allow you to take immediateactions. For example, when you have a missed call, tap the available iconsto return the call or reply with a text message.§Tap the notification icon on the left to open the corresponding app.§To dismiss just one notification in the list, drag it left or right.3. To close the Notifications panel, slide up from the bottom bar of the panel orpress . You can also tap to dismiss all notifications and close the Notifications panel.31 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-31.png)
![Working with textSelecting, copying, and pasting textIn HTC apps such as Internet and Mail, you can select and copy text, and then paste orshare it.1. Press and hold on a word.2. Drag the start and end anchors to highlight the surrounding text you want toselect. You can use the magnifier to zoom in while selecting your text. To turn on themagnifier, go to Settings > Accessibility, and then select the Show magnifieroption. You'll see the magnifier when you press and hold one of the text selectionanchors.3. After you have selected the text you want to copy, tap Copy. The selected text is then copied to the clipboard.4. In a text entry field (for example while composing an email), press and hold atthe point where you want to paste the text.5. Tap Paste.To copy the address of a linked webpage in the Internet app, press and hold thelink, and then tap Copy link URL.Sharing text1. After you have selected the text you want to share, tap Share.2. Choose where to paste and share the selected text, such as in an email messageor social network status update.32 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-32.png)
![The HTC Sense keyboardTyping is fast and accurate with the HTC Sense™ keyboard.§Word prediction also saves typing time. As you type, you'll see wordsuggestions that you can choose from. You can even add words, phrases, andshortcuts to the word prediction dictionary. See Entering text with wordprediction on page 34.§You can type words by just speaking. See Entering text by speaking on page36.§Turn on the Trace keyboard so you can type words by just sliding your fingerfrom one letter to another. See Using the Trace keyboard on page 36.§Just swipe right to access the numeric and symbol keyboard. Or swipe left toswitch between languages.§The keys have secondary numbers, punctuation symbols, or other charactersthat you can insert without having to switch to the numeric and symbolkeyboard.For example, just press and hold a key on the first row to insert a number.§Choose from a wide selection of emoji.§Show or hide navigational arrow keys on the keyboard. If you enable the arrowkeys in Settings, they'll only appear on the portrait keyboard.Entering textThe onscreen keyboard becomes available when you tap a text field in an app. Enterletters and numbers, change the keyboard layout or language, and more.Tap the keys on the onscreen keyboard to enter letters and numbers, as well aspunctuation marks and symbols.§Tap to enter an uppercase letter. Tap twice to turn on caps lock.§Press and hold keys with gray characters at the top to enter numbers, symbols,or accented letters. Some keys have multiple characters or accents associatedwith them.§Swipe right to show number and symbol keys. To return to the main keyboard,swipe left.§Tap above the keyboard or press to close the onscreen keyboard.To open the keyboard settings, tap above the keyboard. Or go to Settings >Language & keyboard > HTC Sense Input.33 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-33.png)
![Selecting a keyboard layoutChoose a keyboard layout that suits your typing style.1. Tap above the keyboard.2. Tap Keyboard selection > Keyboard types.3. Select the keyboard layout that you want to use.Choosing and switching between keyboard languagesIf multiple keyboard languages are available on HTC One max, you can choose whichlanguages to enable in the onscreen keyboard.1. Tap above the keyboard.2. Tap Keyboard selection, and then choose the languages you want.To change the keyboard language, do any of the following:§Swipe left on the onscreen keyboard (not available if you're using tracekeyboard).§Tap the language key (for example, ) until you see the keyboard languageyou want to use.§Press and hold the language key, and then drag your finger to the keyboardlanguage you want to use.Entering text with word predictionEver started typing something you weren't sure how to spell? With word prediction,you'll see suggested words displayed just above the keyboard.Word prediction and next word prediction are enabled by default.To enter text in word prediction mode, do any of the following:§Tap the space bar to insert a highlighted word in the suggestion list.§Tap a word from the suggestion list.§Tap the arrow next to the suggestion list to see more choices.If you've accidentally chosen a wrong word from the suggestion list, you canalways go back and change it by tapping the word and selecting anothersuggestion.34 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-34.png)
![Setting a second language for word predictionYou can set the word prediction to be bilingual. As you type, you’ll get wordsuggestions in the languages that you’ve selected.Bilingual prediction is available only when you're using a Latin-based keyboard.1. Tap above the keyboard.2. Tap Keyboard selection > Bilingual prediction, and then choose the languageyou want.Adding words and phrases to the word prediction dictionaryAdd frequently-used names, acronyms, and even phrases to the word predictiondictionary to easily find them in the suggestion list.Type even faster when you create text shortcuts to words and phrases. Instead oftyping "Talk to you later", save a few keystrokes by adding the ttyl shortcut. Inyour message or email, just type "ttyl", and then tap the spacebar to enter thecomplete phrase.1. Tap above the keyboard.2. Tap Personal dictionary > .3. Enter a word or phrase, and then enter its text shortcut. Be sure to rememberthis shortcut, including the uppercase and lowercase letters you've typed.4. Tap OK.While you're entering text using the Standard keyboard layout, tapping asuggested word that’s not in the dictionary (usually the first word shown in thesuggestion list) automatically stores it.Editing or deleting words and phrases in the word prediction dictionary1. Tap above the keyboard.2. Tap Personal dictionary.§To edit a word, phrase, or shortcut, tap the item in the list.§To delete items from the dictionary, tap > Delete. Select the words youwant to remove, and then tap Delete.35 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-35.png)
![Using the Trace keyboardInstead of tapping the keys on the onscreen keyboard, you can "trace" to type words.You need to turn on the Trace keyboard in Settings > Language & keyboard > HTCSense Input.1. Slide your finger from one letter to the next to enter a word.2. Lift your finger when the word is completed.You can also do the following while using the Trace keyboard:§Tap the space bar to insert a highlighted word.§Tap a word from the suggestion list.§Tap the arrow next to the suggestion list to see more choices.Entering text by speakingNo time to type? Try speaking the words to enter them.1. Tap an area where you want to enter text.2. Tap above the keyboard.3. When you see the animated microphone button and the words "Speak now",say the words you want to enter. To set the voice input language, tap the language bar above the microphonebutton. You can choose one or more languages. Available languages may vary.4. If a word doesn't match what you've spoken and it's underlined, tap theunderlined word to delete it or to see more choices.5. Enter punctuation marks by saying the name (for example, say "comma").36 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-36.png)
![BatteryChecking battery usageSee a ranking list of apps that are using the battery. You can also see how much andhow long the battery has been used for each app.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Power.2. Tap Usage, and then tap an app to check how it's using the battery. You'll seehow much battery power is used by resources such as the CPU for the app andother use details.If you see buttons while viewing an app's battery use details, you can tap them toadjust settings that affect battery usage, stop the app, and more.Displaying the battery percentageYou can check the percentage of remaining battery power right from the status bar.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Power.2. Select Show battery level.Checking battery historyCheck how long you've been using HTC One max since the last charge. You can alsosee a chart that shows how long the screen has been on, and how long you've beenusing connections like the mobile network or Wi-Fi.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Power.2. Tap History.3. If you've used HTC One max for a long time since the last charge, swipe left orright to scale the graph that details battery usage over time. You can also slide two fingers together or apart to scale the graph.Getting the battery to last longerHow long the battery can last before it needs recharging depends on how you useHTC One max. HTC One max power management helps to increase battery life.In times when you need to extend the battery life more, try out some of these tips:Check your battery usageMonitoring your battery usage helps you identify what's using the most power so youcan choose what to do about it. For details, see Checking battery usage on page 37.37 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-37.png)
![Manage your connections§Turn off wireless connections you're not using.To turn on or off connections such as mobile data, Wi-Fi, or Bluetooth, go toSettings and tap their On/Off switches.§Turn GPS on only when a precise location is needed.To prevent some apps from using GPS in the background, keep the GPSsatellites setting off. Turn it on only when you need your precise location whileusing navigation or location-based apps. Go to Settings and tap Location toturn this setting on or off.§If the Sleep mode option in Settings > Power is enabled, at low peak times, yourphone will turn off the data connection after the screen has been off for 15minutes and there's no network activity (no downloads, streaming, or datausage). The data connection resumes when you switch the screen back on.§Turn on Airplane mode when you don't need any wireless connections and youdon't want to receive calls or messages.Manage your displayLowering the brightness, letting the display sleep when not in use, and keeping itsimple helps save battery power.§Use automatic brightness (the default), or manually lower the brightness.§Set the screen timeout to a shorter time.§Don't use a live wallpaper for your Home screen. Animation effects are nice toshow off to other people but they drain your battery.Changing your wallpaper to a plain, black background can also help a little. Theless color is displayed, the less battery is used.§Set the web browser to auto dim the screen while webpages load. Open theInternet app, and then tap > Settings > Accessibility > Dim screen duringpage loading.For more details, see Settings and security on page 143 and Personalizing on page47.Manage your apps§Install the latest software and application updates. Updates sometimes includebattery performance improvements.§Uninstall or disable apps that you never use.Many apps run processes or sync data in the background even when you're notusing them. If there are apps that you don't need anymore, uninstall them.If an app came preloaded and can't be uninstalled, disabling the app can stillprevent it from continuously running or syncing data. In Settings > Apps, swipeto the All tab, tap the app, and then tap Disable.38 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-38.png)
![Limit background data and syncBackground data and sync can use a lot of battery power if you have many appssyncing data in the background. It’s recommended not to let apps sync data toooften. Determine which apps can be set with longer sync times, or sync manually.§In Settings, tap Accounts & sync and check what types of data are being syncedin your online accounts. When the battery is starting to run low, temporarilydisable syncing some data.§If you have many email accounts, consider prolonging the sync time of someaccounts.In the Mail app, select an account, tap > Settings > Sync, Send & Receive, andthen adjust the settings under Sync schedule.§When you’re not traveling from one place to another, sync weather updates ofonly your current location, rather than in all of your named cities. Open theWeather app, and then tap > Edit to remove unneeded cities.§Choose widgets wisely.Some widgets constantly sync data. Consider removing the ones that are notimportant from your Home screen.§In Play Store, tap > Settings, and then clear Auto-add widgets to avoidautomatically adding Home screen widgets whenever you've installed new apps.Also tap Auto-update apps > Do not auto-update apps if you're fine withupdating apps from Play Store manually.Other tipsTo squeeze in a little bit more battery power, try these tips:§Tone down the ringtone and media volume.§Minimize the use of vibration or sound feedback. In Settings, tap Sound andchoose which ones you don't need and can disable.§Check your apps’ settings as you may find more options to optimize the battery.39 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-39.png)
![Using power saver modePower saver mode helps to increase battery life. It reduces the usage of phonefeatures that drain the battery such as the display and data connection.1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. Tap the Power saver tile to turn power saver mode on or off. If you want to choose which phone features to conserve power for, tap firstbefore you turn power saver mode on.If power saver mode's Data connection option is selected, HTC One maxautomatically disconnects from the mobile network after 15 minutes when thescreen is off and the data connection is idle (no download activity, streaming, ordata usage). It reconnects and then disconnects periodically when the dataconnection is idle to save battery power.Keep in mind though that the Sleep mode option for the data connection inSettings > Power, when enabled, overrides power saver mode.40 Your first week with your new phoneOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-40.png)
![CameraCamera basicsTake great photos and videos with the camera, and make them more memorable byapplying a variety of effects and scenes.Open the Camera app to capture that perfect moment. While waiting to take yournext photo, switch HTC One max to Sleep mode. When you're ready to take morephotos and videos, just press POWER again to use the camera.Use the controls on the Viewfinder screen to add effects, set the flash, and more.Zooming§Before taking a photo or video, slide two fingers apart to zoom in or together tozoom out.§When you see the zoom bar, slide your finger on the zoom bar to zoom in orout.§When you're recording video, you can freely zoom in or out while recording.Switching between the front and main cameraOn the Viewfinder screen, do any of the following:§Pull from the top or bottom edge in landscape view.§Pull from the left or right edge in portrait view.§Tap and then tap the Front/Main switch.Some camera features are not available when you’re using the front camera, suchas zooming.41 CameraOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-41.png)
![Choosing an effectUse the available camera effects to make your photos look like they’ve been takenthrough special lenses or filters. You can also apply certain effects to videos.1. Tap .2. Scroll through the available effects and tap one that you like. Effects marked with can only be applied to photos.Setting the video resolution1. On the Viewfinder screen, tap .2. Under Settings, tap Video Quality, and then choose a video resolution.Choosing a flash modeTap the flash icon to choose a flash mode. When using Flash on or Auto flash mode, the camera intelligently sets the best flashbrightness for your photo.Taking a photo1. Open the Camera app.2. Just point the camera at what you want to capture. The camera adjusts thefocus automatically as you move it.3. When you're ready to take the photo, tap . You can also tap anywhere on the screen to take a photo if you turned on Touch tocapture in > Shutter option.Recording video1. Open the Camera app.2. When you're ready to start recording, tap .3. While recording, you can:§Freely zoom in or out.§Change focus to a different subject or area by just tapping it on theViewfinder screen.§Tap the flash icon to turn the flash on or off.4. To stop recording, tap .42 CameraOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-42.png)
![Taking a photo while recording a video (VideoPic)Make sure that you're in Normal scene to use this feature.While you're recording video using the main camera, tap to capture a still shot ofyour subject.Taking continuous camera shotsDo you want to take photos of moving subjects? Whether it’s your kid's football gameor a car race, you can capture the action.Make sure that you're in Normal scene to use this feature.1. On the Viewfinder screen, just press and hold . The camera takes up to 20consecutive shots of your subject.2. After taking the shots, do any of the following:§To keep just one photo, select the photo that you like the most, and thentap Best shot.§To save the photos as a batch, press .To get creative with your photos, open and edit them in the Gallery app. Additionalediting features are available for a batch of continuous shots, such as SequenceShot, Always Smile, and Object Removal.43 CameraOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-43.png)
![Camera scenesA scene is a collection of settings to suit the lighting and environment. Use Normaland let the camera automatically determine optimal settings, or choose from a wideselection of scenes before you start taking photos.Try the Anti-shake mode to help lessen shakes and blurs in your photos.Improving portrait shotsIf you'd like your family or friends to look their best in your photos, make sure to usethe portrait scene. It smoothens the skin in your shots.1. On the Viewfinder screen, tap .2. Under Photo capture mode, tap next to Scene, and then tap Portrait.3. When you're ready to take the photo, tap .Taking a self portraitNo one around to take your photo?1. Switch to the front camera by pulling the Viewfinder screen's top or bottomedge in landscape view. In portrait view, you can pull from the left or right edge to switch to the frontcamera.2. Tap anywhere on the screen to start the timer. The camera takes a photo afterthe countdown.Taking HTC Zoe photosDon’t let the best moments just pass by. When timing is everything, capture the exactmoment with HTC Zoe™ and get more than just a still photo.Some camera features are not available when you’re using HTC Zoe, such aszooming.1. On the Viewfinder screen, tap to switch HTC Zoe on.2. When you're ready to capture, tap . When you see the shutter release iconslowly turn red , continue holding the phone steady as the camera capturesa few seconds of shots.You'll find HTC Zoe photos in the Gallery app comprised of a video clip and a coverphoto.44 CameraOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-44.png)
![What is HTC Zoe?HTC Zoe captures a series of high quality photos and collects them in a short videoclip. Like the traditional "Zoetrope" that inspired it, HTC Zoe photos are in motionwhen you view them.But HTC Zoe is more than just a camera mode. With HTC Zoe, you can:§Get creative with advanced editing features in Gallery such as Sequence Shot,Always Smile, and Object Removal.§Extract and save a specific image from your HTC Zoe shot while viewing it inGallery.§Share HTC Zoe shots to your social networks using HTC Share.Taking a panoramic photoGet a wider shot of natural or urban landscapes in one sweep.Some camera features are not available when you’re in this mode, such as zooming.1. On the Viewfinder screen, tap .2. Under Photo capture mode, tap Sweep panorama.3. When you're ready to take the shot, tap . Directional arrows appear,prompting you to pan left or right in either landscape or portrait view.4. Pan HTC One max as smoothly as you can to automatically capture frames. You can also tap to stop capturing anytime.The camera stitches the frames into a single photo.Using HDRWhen shooting portraits against a bright background, use the HDR (High DynamicRange) scene to capture your subjects clearly. HDR brings out the details of both thehighlights and shadows, even in high contrast lighting.1. On the Viewfinder screen, tap .2. To take an HDR photo, under Photo capture mode, tap HDR, and then tap . HDR works best when your subject is steady. The camera takes multiple shots atdifferent exposure levels and combines them into one enhanced photo.3. To capture an HDR video, under Video capture mode, tap Scene > Video HDR(Full HD), and then tap .45 CameraOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-45.png)
![Recording videos in slow motionRelive high speed action bit by bit and add a touch of suspense to your videos.Audio is not captured when you're in this mode.1. On the Viewfinder screen, tap .2. Under Video capture mode, tap Scene > Slow motion video.3. Frame your subject on the Viewfinder screen.4. Tap to start recording.5. To stop recording, tap .After recording your slow motion video, you can change the playback speed ofselected sections when you edit the video in Gallery.46 CameraOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-46.png)
![PersonalizingMaking HTC One max truly yoursMake HTC One max look and sound just the way you want it. Personalize it with adifferent wallpaper and ringtone, and you can also choose notification sounds forevents such as incoming text, email, and calendar reminders.Changing your wallpaperPick your favorite photo as your Home wallpaper. Choose from the availablewallpapers, or use any photo you've taken with the camera.You can also use the HTC Get Started service to choose a photo from your computeras your wallpaper.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Personalize.2. Tap Wallpaper.3. Tap one of the following:HTC wallpapers Choose a preset wallpaper, and then tap Preview.Live wallpapers Choose a preset animated wallpaper, and then tap Preview.If the animated wallpaper you chose can be customized, tapSettings.ComputerphotosUse the HTC Get Started service to choose a photo fromyour computer and use it as a wallpaper on HTC One max.Gallery Choose an existing photo and crop it.4. Tap Done or Apply.47 PersonalizingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-47.png)
![Personalizing the launch barThe launch bar gives you one-touch access to commonly used apps. You can replacethe apps on the launch bar with other apps you often use.1. Press and hold the app you want to replace, and then drag it out to . 2. Press and hold an app, and then drag it to the empty slot on the launch bar.§You can also group apps on the launch bar into a folder.§The apps or shortcuts you see on the lock screen are the same as the ones on thelaunch bar.Adding a widget to your Home screenWidgets make at-a-glance important information and media content easily available.Choose from a selection of widgets and add the most useful ones to your Homescreen.1. On the Feeds panel or any widget panel, slide two fingers together to customizethe Home screen.2. Tap > Widgets. You can:§Swipe to browse through the widgets.§Tap to search for specific widgets.Some widgets are available in different styles and sizes.3. Press and hold and then drag a widget to a home screen thumbnail where youwant to add it.You can also add widgets that allow you to quickly switch on or off certain settingssuch as Wi-Fi and Bluetooth.48 PersonalizingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-48.png)
![Changing the settings of a widgetYou can modify basic settings of some widgets (for example, the People widget) fromthe Home screen.1. Press and hold a widget on your Home screen, and then drag it to . The relevant screen where you can change some settings for this widget thenopens.2. Customize the widget settings.Resizing a widgetSome widgets can be resized after you've added them to your Home screen.1. Press and hold a widget on the Home screen, and then release your finger. If aborder appears, that means the widget is resizable.2. Drag the sides of the border to enlarge or shrink the widget size.Adding apps and other shortcuts on yourHome screenPlace apps you often use on any widget panel of your Home screen. You can also addshortcuts to frequently used settings, bookmarked webpages, and more.1. On the Feeds panel or any widget panel, slide two fingers together to customizethe Home screen.2. Tap > Apps or Shortcuts. You can:§Swipe to browse through the apps or shortcuts.§Tap to search for specific apps or shortcuts.3. Press and hold and then drag an app or a shortcut to a home screen thumbnailwhere you want to add it.To add an app from the All Apps screen, press and hold an app and drag it to .Drop the app on an empty space on the Home screen.49 PersonalizingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-49.png)
![Rearranging or removing widgets and icons onyour Home screenMoving a widget or iconYou can easily move a widget or icon from one widget panel to another.1. Press and hold the widget or icon with one finger.2. With another finger, flick left or right to rotate the screen to another widgetpanel. 3. Release the widget or icon.4. To move the widget or icon to another position on the panel, just press and holdand then drag it.Removing a widget or icon1. Press and hold the widget or icon you want to remove, and then drag it to .2. When the widget or icon turns red, lift your finger.Arranging apps on the All Apps screenPersonalize the All Apps screen to your liking. You can rearrange the apps and changethe layout.1. From the Feeds panel or any widget panel, tap .2. Pull down and hold the screen until you see an icon bar. 50 PersonalizingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-50.png)
![3. Tap > Grid size to choose whether to display more or fewer apps per page.4. If you're not in Custom view, tap > Custom.5. To move an app, press and hold the app, and then do one of the following:§Drag the app to another position on the same page. Wait until you see theoccupying icon move away before releasing your finger.§Drag the app to the or arrow to move it to another page.You can also group apps into folders and hide or unhide apps.Grouping apps into a folderYou can combine apps into folders on the All Apps screen, launch bar, or on thewidget panels of your Home screen.To group apps on the All Apps screen, you need to be in Custom view.1. Press and hold an app, and then drag it over to another app to automaticallycreate a folder. 2. To add more apps into the folder, do the following:§On the All Apps screen, drag each app over to the folder.§On the launch bar or widget panel, first tap the folder to open it. Tap ,select apps that you want to add, and then tap Done.You can also add shortcuts to settings or information to a folder that's on thelaunch bar or widget panel. Add a shortcut first to a widget panel, and then drag itover to the folder.Renaming a folder1. Tap the folder to open it.2. Tap the folder window’s title bar.3. Enter a new folder name.4. Tap outside the folder to close it.51 PersonalizingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-51.png)
![Removing items from a folder1. Tap the folder to open it.2. Do one of the following:§From a folder on the All Apps screen, press and hold an app, and then dragit out of the folder.§From a folder on the launch bar or widget panel, press and hold an app,and then drag it out to .If there's only one item left in the folder, the folder ungroups the last item andremoves itself automatically.Hiding or unhiding appsOn the All Apps screen, you can hide apps that you don't use. You can easily unhidethem later when you need them.1. On the All Apps screen, pull down and hold the screen until you see an icon bar. 2. Tap > Hide/Unhide apps.3. Select the apps you want to hide, or clear their check boxes to unhide them.4. Tap Done.Adding, removing, or arranging widget panels§You won't be able to add a new widget panel if you've already reached themaximum limit.§If the Feeds panel is not hidden, it always appears as the first panel. A widgetpanel cannot be inserted before the Feeds panel.1. On the Feeds panel or any widget panel, slide two fingers together to customizethe Home screen.2. To add a new widget panel, swipe left across the Home screen thumbnails untilyou reach the last thumbnail, and then tap .3. To remove a widget panel, press and hold its thumbnail, and then drag it to .4. To move a widget panel, press and hold its thumbnail, and then drag it left orright to the position that you want.52 PersonalizingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-52.png)
![Changing your main Home screenBy default, the Feeds panel is the main Home screen. Instead of jumping to the Feedspanel when pressing the HOME button, you can go directly to a widget panel.1. On the Feeds panel or any widget panel, slide two fingers together to customizethe Home screen.2. Tap a widget panel that you want to be your main Home screen.3. Tap Set as home.Pressing from an app will first return you to the last panel you were in. Justpress again to go to your main Home screen.Changing the sounds for your ringtone,notifications, and alarm1. Go to Settings, and then tap Personalize.2. Under Sound, choose different sounds for your ringtone, system notification,and alarm. Go to the Messages, Mail, Calendar, and Tasks apps to choose sounds for newmessages, email, calendar, and task reminders respectively.Want alarms to ring louder but notifications to be more discreet? In Settings, tapSound > Volumes and set the volume levels for each sound type.Rearranging application tabsYou can add to or rearrange the tabs in some apps to make it easy to get to the mostimportant information.1. Open an app that has tabs.2. Press and hold a tab until a screen for rearranging tabs appears.3. You can:§Select the tabs you want to add.§Change the order of the tabs. Press and hold next to a tab, and thendrag to the new position.4. Tap Done.53 PersonalizingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-53.png)
![Phone callsMaking a call with Smart dialYou can either dial a number directly, or use Smart dial to quickly place a call. Smartdial searches and calls a stored/synced contact or a number from your call history.HTC One max is available in either a 3G or LTE version, depending on your regionand mobile operator. You need an LTE plan to use your operator's 4G/LTE networkfor voice calls and data services. Check with your operator for details.1. Open the Phone app.2. Enter the phone number or first few letters of the contact’s name to see the topmatching contact. If there is more than one match, you'll be told how many matches. For example, tap"8 MATCHES" to see all 8 matches.3. Tap the contact you want to call. §To check other phone numbers associated with the contact, tap beside thecontact name.§If the phone number has an extension, tap after connecting to the main line andthen dial the extension number.4. To hang up, tap End Call.Changing the Phone dialer layoutSwitch between the Smart dial keypad to find contacts with just a few taps and a fullscreen keypad that gives you more room to enter phone numbers.1. Open the Phone app.2. Tap > Full screen keypad or Smart dial keypad.54 Phone callsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-54.png)
![Dialing an extension numberTo skip voice prompts when dialing an extension number, do one of the following:§After dialing the main number, press and hold * . The letter p is added to thenumber you are dialing. Enter the extension number, and then tap Call. You willbe connected to the mainline and then to the extension number.§After dialing the main number, press and hold #. The letter w is added to thenumber you are dialing. Enter the extension number, and then tap Call. Afterconnecting to the main line, tap Send to dial the extension number.You can save phone numbers with an extension in the People app.Returning a missed callYou'll see the missed call icon in the status bar when you miss a call.1. Slide the Notifications panel open to check who the caller is.2. To return the call, spread your two fingers on the missed call notification toexpand it, and then tap Call back.If you have multiple missed calls, tap the missed calls notification to open the CallHistory tab.Using Speed dialUse Speed dial to call a phone number with a single tap. For example, if you assign acontact’s number to the number 2 key, you can just press and hold 2 to dial thenumber.The number 1 key is generally reserved for your voicemail. Press and hold this keyto call voicemail and retrieve your voicemail messages.Assigning a speed dial key1. Open the Phone app.2. Tap > Speed dial > . You can also press and hold an unassigned key on the dialpad, and then tap Yes.3. Select a contact from the list.4. On the Speed dial screen, choose the phone number of the contact to use, and aspeed dial key to assign.5. Tap Save.55 Phone callsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-55.png)
![Calling a phone number in a text message1. Tap the phone number within the message.2. Tap Call. To call the message sender, tap the received message, and then tap Call on theoptions menu.Calling a phone number in an email1. Tap the phone number in the email body.2. Tap Call.Calling a phone number in a Calendar event1. Open an event in Calendar.2. On the Event details screen, tap the phone number.3. Tap Call.Making an emergency callIn some regions, you can make emergency calls from HTC One max even if you don’thave a micro SIM card installed or your micro SIM card has been blocked.If you don't have a network signal, you won't be able to make an emergency call.1. Open the Phone app.2. Dial the emergency number for your locale, and then tap Call.If you've enabled but forgotten your lock password or lock pattern, you can stillmake emergency calls by tapping Emergency call on the screen.56 Phone callsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-56.png)
![Receiving callsWhen you receive a phone call from a contact, the Incoming call screen appears.HTC One max will automatically adjust the ringtone volume when you use thepolite ringer and pocket mode features.Answering or rejecting a callDo one of the following:§If the display is on when you get a call, tap Answer or Decline.§If the display is locked when you get a call, drag or upwards.After declining a call, you can send a text message to the caller or create a task toremind you to return the call.You can also press the POWER button twice to reject a call.Muting the ringing sound without rejecting the callDo one of the following:§Press the VOLUME DOWN or VOLUME UP button.§Press the POWER button.§Place HTC One max face down on a level surface.If HTC One max is already facing down, it will still ring when there are subsequentincoming calls.Look who's callingEvery time you make a call or your friend gives you a ring, you get to see your friend’slatest social network status update right on the call screen. You’ll also see a birthdayreminder if your friend’s birthday (stored on your phone or online account) willhappen in a few days.Viewing a task reminder while on a callDid you promise to babysit for a friend this weekend? If you associate a task with adue date to a contact, you'll see a task reminder on the call screen when you're on acall with that friend.If the contact has a recent status update, you won't be able to see the taskreminder.57 Phone callsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-57.png)
![What can I do during a call?When a call is in progress, you can turn the speakerphone on, place the call on hold,and more.Putting a call on holdTo put the call on hold, tap . The status bar then displays the hold call icon .To resume the call, tap .Switching between callsIf you’re already in a call and you accept another call, you can switch between the twocalls.1. When you receive another call, tap Answer to accept the second call and putthe first call on hold.2. To switch between the calls, tap the person you want to talk to on the screen.Turning the speakerphone on or off during a callTo decrease potential damage to your hearing, do not hold HTC One max to yourear when the speakerphone is on.§On the call screen, tap . The speakerphone icon appears in the status bar.§To turn the speakerphone off, tap .Muting the microphone during a callOn the call screen, tap to toggle between turning the microphone on or off. Whenthe microphone is turned off, the mute icon appears in the status bar.Ending a callDo one of the following to end the call:§On the call screen, tap End Call.§Slide the Notifications panel open, then tap .If the phone number of the person who called is not in your contacts list, you canchoose to save the number to your contacts list after you hang up.58 Phone callsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-58.png)
![Setting up a conference callConference calling with your friends, family, or co-workers is easy. Make the first call(or accept a call), and then simply dial each subsequent call to add it to theconference.Make sure your micro SIM card is enabled with conference calling service. Contactyour mobile operator for details.1. Make a call to the first conference call participant.2. When connected, tap > Add call, and then dial the number of the secondparticipant. The first participant is put on hold.3. When connected to the second participant, tap .4. To add another participant, tap , and then dial the number of the contact.5. When connected, tap to add the participant to the conference call.6. To talk to a person in the conference call in private, tap and then selectPrivate call.To end the call with a participant, tap and then tap Finish this call.To end the conference call, tap End Call.Checking calls in the Call HistoryUse Call History to check missed calls, your dialed numbers, and received calls.1. Open the Phone app.2. Swipe to view the Call History tab.3. Do one of the following:§Tap a name or number in the list to call.§Press and hold a name or number in the list to display the options menu.§Tap to display just a particular type of call such as missed calls oroutgoing calls.Adding a new phone number to your contacts from Call History1. On the Call History tab, tap .2. Choose whether to create a new contact or save the number to an existingcontact.59 Phone callsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-59.png)
![Clearing the Call History listOn the Call History tab, do one of the following:Remove one name ornumberPress and hold the name or number, and then tap Deletefrom call history.Clear the entire list Tap > Remove call history. On the Delete from call historyscreen, tap > Select all, and then tap Delete.Blocking a callerWhen you block a phone number or a contact, all calls from the phone number orcontact will be declined automatically.On the Call History tab, press and hold the contact or phone number you want toblock, and then tap Block contact.You can always remove a caller from your blocked list. On the Call History tab, tap > Blocked contacts. Press and hold a contact, and then tap Unblock contacts.Changing ringtone settingsSwitching between silent, vibrate, and normal modesDo one of the following:§To change from silent to normal mode, press the VOLUME UP button.§To change from vibrate to normal mode, press the VOLUME UP button twice.§Go to Settings, and then tap Sound > Sound profile.Lowering the ring volume automaticallyHTC One max has a quiet ring feature that automatically lowers the ring volume whenyou move it.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Sound.2. Select the Quiet ring on pickup option.Making HTC One max ring louder in your pocket or bagTo help avoid missing incoming calls when HTC One max is in your pocket or bag, thepocket mode feature gradually increases the ring volume and vibrates when youreceive a call.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Sound.2. Select the Pocket mode option.60 Phone callsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-60.png)
![Home dialingWhen you're on a trip abroad, it's easy to dial friends and family from home.Your home country code is automatically added when you call your contacts whileroaming. But when manually entering a phone number to call, you need to enter a plus(+) sign and country code before the number.Using a roaming service may incur additional charges. Check with your mobileoperator for rates before using a roaming service.Changing the default country code for Home dialing1. Go to Settings, and then tap Call.2. Tap Home dialing settings.3. Select a country, and then tap OK.Turning off Home dialingIf you prefer to manually enter complete phone numbers to call while roaming, youcan turn off Home dialing.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Call.2. Under Other settings, clear the Home dialing option.61 Phone callsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-61.png)
![MessagesSending a text message (SMS)1. Open the Messages app.2. Tap .3. Enter a contact name or mobile number in the To field.4. Tap the box that says Add text, and then enter your message. 5. Tap , or press to save the message as a draft. §There is a limit on the number of characters for a single text message (displayedabove ). If you exceed the limit, your text message will be delivered as one butwill be billed as more than one message.§Your text message automatically becomes a multimedia message if you enter anemail address as the recipient, add a message subject, attach an item, or composea very long message.Sending a multimedia message (MMS)1. Open the Messages app.2. Tap .3. Enter a contact name, mobile number, or email address in the To field.4. To add a subject line, tap > Add subject.5. Tap the box that says Add text, and then enter your message.62 MessagesOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-62.png)
![6. Tap , and then choose an attachment type. Record videos with minimum resolution so you can reduce the file size of yourattachments. In Camera settings, tap Video Quality > MMS.7. Select or browse for the item to attach.8. After adding an attachment, tap to see options for replacing, viewing orremoving your attachment.9. Tap , or press to save the message as a draft.Depending on the resolution of your photo or video attachments, they may bedisplayed as cropped thumbnails in your multimedia message.Creating a slideshow1. After you've added either a photo, video, or audio in the multimedia messageyou’re composing, tap > Slide.2. Choose where you want to insert the next slide.3. Right after adding a slide, do one of the following:§Tap , and then choose to add a photo or a video.§Tap > Audio to add music or a voice recording to a slide.§Tap Add text, and then enter your caption.§Tap to see options for replacing, viewing, or removing yourattachment.4. Tap > Preview. Tap once on the preview screen to see playback controls.5. When finished, tap , or press to save the message as a draft.Can't find your contacts' email addresses in Messages?1. If only phone numbers are showing up when you're entering a contactname, tap .2. Tap > Show Email.To always show email addresses, in Message settings, tap General > Showemail address.63 MessagesOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-63.png)
![Sending a group messageGroup messaging makes it easy to send a message to multiple contacts all at once.You can choose to send a group SMS or group MMS.Group MMS may incur extra data fees.1. Open the Messages app.2. Tap .3. Tap , and then select multiple recipients.4. To send a group SMS, make sure that Send as individual messages is selected.Clear this option to send your message as a group MMS.GroupSMSYour message will be sent to the recipients as a text message andyou will be charged by your mobile operator for each message sent.Replies of your recipients are sorted separately.GroupMMSSimilar to a group chat, sending a group MMS lets your recipientsjoin the conversation you've started.HTC One max also organizes message replies in a singleconversation thread. If this is your first time to send a group MMS,you may need to enter your mobile phone number.5. Tap the box that says Add text, then enter your message.6. Tap .Top questions on group MMSWhy can't my recipients see or join the group MMS I sent tothem?Check whether your recipients have enabled Group messaging on their mobiledevices. Some devices or mobile operators may not support this feature.How do I receive or block group MMS?In Message settings, tap Multimedia messages (MMS), and then turn GroupMessaging on or off.64 MessagesOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-64.png)
![Resuming a draft messageOpen a draft message right from the Messages screen, edit the message, and then tap.To see all draft messages in one place, tap on the Messages screen, and then tapDrafts.Replying to a message1. On the Messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display theexchange of messages with that contact.2. Tap the box that says Add text, and then enter your message.3. Tap .Replying to a contact's other phone numberWhen a contact has multiple phone numbers stored on HTC One max, you can selectwhich phone number to reply to.Keep in mind that your response will be sent to the phone number of the latestmessage you’ve received from this contact.1. On the Messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display theexchange of messages with that contact.2. Tap > Open contact. If you have recently received or sent a message to the contact, tap and selectwhich phone number you want to reply to.3. On the Details tab, tap next to the phone number you want to reply to.65 MessagesOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-65.png)
![4. Tap the box that says Add text, then enter your reply message.5. Tap .Why am I not receiving text messages from contacts who useiPhone?If you have just migrated your contacts from iPhone to HTC One max, yourcontacts may still be texting you through iMessage® and not through SMS orMMS.To receive text messages from your contacts who are using iPhone, you mustunregister the phone number you used on your old iPhone from your Applesupport profile.Or, if you still have your old iPhone, turn off the service in iMessage settings.Saving a text message in the Tasks appSave a text message in your Tasks list so you can remind yourself when to reply.1. On the Messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display theexchange of messages with that contact.2. Tap the message you want to save, and then tap Save as task.3. Enter other details or change the task title.4. Tap Save.Forwarding a message1. On the Messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to view the exchangeof messages with that contact.2. Tap a message, and then tap Forward.3. In the To field, fill in one or more recipients.4. Tap .66 MessagesOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-66.png)
![Viewing and saving an attachment from amultimedia message§If there’s a media attachment such as a photo or video in a received message,tap it to view the content.§To save the attachment, tap the multimedia message, and then choose to savefrom the options menu.§If the attachment is a contact (vCard), tap it and choose where to save it, andthen tap Save to add to your contacts.§If the attachment is an appointment or event (vCalendar), tap it to view theevent details, then tap Save and choose the calendar where to save it.If you are concerned about the size of your data downloads, you can choose tocheck the size and subject first before you download a multimedia message. On theMessages screen, tap > Settings > Multimedia messages (MMS). Clear the Auto-retrieve option.Moving messages to the secure boxYou can move private messages to the secure box. You will need to enter a passwordto read these messages.§The secure box does not encrypt messages.§Messages stored on your mico SIM card cannot be moved to the secure box.1. On the Messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display theexchange of messages with that contact.2. Tap > Move to secure box.3. Select the messages, and then tap Move.To move all the messages from a contact, on the Messages screen, press and holdthe contact and tap Move to secure box.§To read messages in the secure box, on the Messages screen, tap > Secure. Ifit is your first time to use the secure box, set a password.§To remove messages or contacts from the secure box, press and hold thecontact (or phone number) and tap Move to general box.67 MessagesOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-67.png)
![Blocking unwanted messagesDeclutter your Messages screen by moving spam messages from contacts to theblock box. If you have blocked a contact, that contact's text or picture messages willalso be in the block box.§On the Messages screen, press and hold a contact (or phone number) and tapBlock contact.§To block multiple contacts, tap > Block contacts, select the contacts, and tapMove.When the contact sends you messages, you will not see them in the Messages screenor receive notifications and calls.To read messages in the block box, on the Messages screen, tap > Block.§To remove messages or contacts from the block box, press and hold the contact(or phone number) and tap Unblock.§To completely discard future messages from blocked contacts, clear the Saveblock message option in the Messages settings.WAP push messagesWAP push messages contain a web link. Often, the link will be to download a file thatyou have requested from a service provider. Open only links from sources that youtrust.When you receive a WAP push message, a notification icon is displayed in thestatus bar.Opening and reading a new WAP push message1. Open the Notifications panel, and then tap the push message notification.2. Tap Visit website.Viewing all your WAP push messages1. Open the Messages app.2. Tap > Push messages. You can only see this option if you've previously received WAP push messages.68 MessagesOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-68.png)
![Copying a text message to your micro SIMcard1. On the Messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display theexchange of messages with that contact.2. Tap the message, and then tap Copy to SIM. A SIM card icon is displayed.Deleting messages and conversationsOn the Messages screen, do any of the following:Delete amessageOpen the conversation thread with a contact, tap the message,and then tap Delete message.To delete multiple messages within a conversation, tap > Deletemessages > Delete by selection, and then select the messages todelete.Delete aconversationPress and hold a contact (or phone number), and then tap Delete.To delete multiple conversations, on the Messages screen, tap >Delete threads, and then select the conversations to delete.In the Messages settings, tap General > Delete old messages to auto delete oldmessages.How do I protect a message from being deleted?You can lock a message so that it will not be deleted even if you delete theother messages in the conversation.1. On the Messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display theexchange of messages with that contact.2. Tap the message that you want to lock.3. Tap Lock message on the options menu. A lock icon is displayed.69 MessagesOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-69.png)
![Search and web browserSearching HTC One max and the WebYou can search for information on HTC One max and on the Web. Start your searchby entering a keyword or by using Google Voice Search™.Some apps, such as People or Mail, have their own search function, which you canuse to search only within those apps.Performing searches on the Web and HTC One max1. Open the Google app. Or swipe up from the button. If you've already set up a Google account on HTC One max, you will be given theoption to sign in to Google Now™. See Getting instant information with Google Nowon page 71.2. In the search box, enter what you want to search for. As you type, matchingitems on HTC One max and suggestions from Google web search are shown.To search for the information exclusively on HTC One max, swipe your finger up thescreen, and then tap Search phone.3. If what you’re searching for is in the list of suggestions, tap the item to open it inits compatible app.Searching the Web with your voiceUse Google Voice Search to find information on the Web by speaking toHTC One max.1. Open the Google app. Or swipe up from the button.2. Tap , and then say what you want to search for. After speaking, matchingitems from Google web search are shown.3. If what you’re searching for is in the list, tap the item to open it in its compatibleapp. Otherwise, tap to search again.70 Search and web browserOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-70.png)
![Setting search options1. Open the Google app. Or swipe up from the button.2. Do one of the following:§Press to hide the onscreen keyboard.§Scroll to the bottom.3. Tap > Settings to set the following options:§Voice. Set the Google Voice Search language, speech output, and more.§Phone search. Select which apps on HTC One max are included when doinga search.§Privacy & accounts. Manage your location history, enable recent websearches to show, or clear your search history.You can also access the settings when viewing the search results. Pull down thescreen to show the hidden menu button, and then tap > Settings.Getting instant information with Google NowDo you want to know the weather or your morning commute time before you startyour day? Google Now delivers quick and up-to-date information that matters to you—all without the search.Depending on your location, time of day, and previous Google searches, Google Nowdisplays information cards that include:§The day's weather and the weather forecast for upcoming days.§The traffic conditions on your way to work or your commute back home.§The directions and travel time to your next appointment.§The next train or bus arriving at your platform or bus stop.§Your favorite team's score and stats while you enjoy the game.Setting up Google NowBefore setting up Google Now:§Make sure that you're signed in to your Google account.§Turn location services on and make sure that you have an Internet connection.1. Open the Google app. Or swipe up from the button.2. The subsequent screens show examples of Google Now information cards. TapNext until you reach the Get Google Now! screen.71 Search and web browserOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-71.png)
![3. Tap Yes, I'm in. Google Now information cards will start to appear on theGoogle search screen.4. To see all available information cards, tap Show more cards.More information cards will appear on the Google search screen as you useHTC One max to search the Web, create appointments, and more.Changing card settingsYou can easily customize the settings of Google Now cards to suit your informationneeds. For example, you can change the weather units in the Weather card or yourtransportation mode in the Traffic card. You can also specify the details on certaincards or keep a card from appearing on the Google search screen.1. Open the Google app. Or swipe up from the button.2. Tap on the card you want to change, and then tap a setting at the bottom ofthe card. For certain cards that need specific details, such as your work address or sportsteams and stocks you follow, scroll to the bottom of the screen, and then tap >Settings > My stuff.Dismissing and hiding cards1. Open the Google app. Or swipe up from the button.2. Do any of the following:§To dismiss a card, swipe it left or right.§To keep the card from appearing on the Google search screen, scroll to thebottom of the screen and then tap > Settings > Google Now. Tap theOn/Off switch next to the card you want to hide.Refreshing Google NowRefresh Google Now to update the information cards or show relevant cards forinformation that you've just added on HTC One max, like an upcoming event inCalendar.1. Open the Google app. Or swipe up from the button.2. Scroll to the bottom of the screen, and then tap > Refresh.Turning off Google Now1. Open the Google app. Or swipe up from the button.2. Scroll to the bottom of the screen, and then tap > Settings.3. Tap the On/Off switch next to Google Now, and then tap Turn off.72 Search and web browserOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-72.png)
![Browsing the Web1. Open the Internet app.2. Tap the URL box on top of the screen. If the webpage is in fullscreen mode, flick the screen down to show the URL boxand other options.3. Enter the webpage address or your search keywords.4. On the webpage, you can:§Tap a link to open it, or press and hold a link to see more options.§Tap an email address to send a message to the email address, save it toPeople, and more.§Press and hold an image to save, copy, or set it as your wallpaper.5. To return to the previous webpage you've viewed, tap , and then tap or .Maximizing your browsing space§To hide the status bar when browsing, tap > Settings > General, and thenselect Fullscreen.§While browsing a webpage, tap > Desktop View to display the full desktopversion of the webpage.73 Search and web browserOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-73.png)
![Using browser tabsOpen multiple browser tabs and quickly switch from one webpage to another.Open the Internet app.§To add a browser tab, tap > . Repeat the same to open new browser tabs.§To switch among browser tabs, tap and swipe to the webpage you want toview. Tap the browser tab to display the webpage in full screen.§To close a browser tab, tap , and then tap .Saving web content for laterSave webpages to read later, even without an Internet connection. You can also addsome video clips on webpages to the Watch list so you can quickly find and watchthem whenever you like.HTC One max saves webpage text and images only. You will need Internetconnection to open linked pages and play video clips.1. While viewing a webpage, tap > .2. Tap Reading list or Watch list. When the webpage you're adding to the Watch list has one or more video clips,you'll be asked to choose which videos you want to add.To view a saved webpage or video clip, tap > Saved. Swipe to the Reading list orWatch list, and then tap a webpage or video you want to view.74 Search and web browserOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-74.png)
![Setting browser optionsCustomize the web browser to suit your browsing style. Set display, privacy, andsecurity options when using the web browser.From the browser screen, tap > Settings.Bookmarking a webpageAdd your favorite webpages as bookmarks so you can access them quickly.Bookmark a webpage in a normal browser screen and not when you're browsingincognito.1. While viewing a webpage, tap > > Bookmarks.2. On the Bookmark this page screen, you can edit the bookmark name, sync thebookmark with an online account, or save the bookmark in a new categoryfolder.3. Tap Done.To view and open a bookmark, tap > Bookmarks. Navigate to the bookmark youwant to open, and then tap it.You can also add a bookmark directly to the Home screen. While viewing awebpage, tap > > Home screen.75 Search and web browserOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-75.png)
![Not seeing your bookmark?On the Bookmarks screen, tap and select All bookmarks. HTC One max willdisplay all your bookmarks, including those which are synced with an onlineaccount.Syncing your bookmarks with Google ChromeCreate bookmarks from your computer's Google Chrome™ browser and sync them onHTC One max. For more information about Google Chrome, visit http://support.google.com/chrome.§Using your Google Chrome desktop browser, you need to sign in to your GoogleAccount and set up Google Chrome sync.§Be sure that you are logged in to your Google Account every time you saveGoogle Chrome bookmarks on your computer.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Accounts & sync.2. Tap Google.3. Tap your Google Account.4. Select the Internet option.Using your browsing historyHTC One max keeps a record of webpages you've visited.If you don't want HTC One max to keep your browsing history, browse using anincognito tab. See Private browsing on page 77.1. While viewing a webpage, tap > History.2. Swipe to the History or Most visited tab.3. Navigate to the webpage that you want to view, and then tap it.76 Search and web browserOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-76.png)
![Clearing your browsing history1. While viewing a webpage, tap > Settings > Privacy & security > Clear history.2. Tap OK.All webpage entries in the History and Most visited tabs are deleted.If you want to delete a single webpage entry, go to the History or Most visited tab,press and hold the webpage entry, and then tap Remove from history or Removefrom most visited.Private browsingYou can use incognito tabs to browse the Web with more privacy. Browser cookiesare deleted and not shared when you close all incognito tabs. Pages you view inincognito also won't appear in your browser history (except for files you'vedownloaded).From the browser screen, tap > .77 Search and web browserOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-77.png)
![EntertainmentMusicListening to musicEnjoy your favorite songs on HTC One max using the Music app.When you open the Music app for the first time, you'll be asked if you would like toautomatically download related content, such as album covers and artist photos, toHTC One max.1. Open the Music app.2. Swipe to the different tabs to browse by category.3. Tap a song to play.4. Tap the onscreen icons to control music playback, repeat songs, and more.Press and drag your finger across theprogress bar to jump to any part of the song.Turn shuffle on or off. (Shuffle is off whenbutton is gray.)Cycle through the repeat modes: repeat allsongs, repeat current song, and don’t repeat.Play your music on a DLNA® compliant TV oraudio system, HTC Media Link HD, or stereoBluetooth device.Minimize the Now playing screen to continuebrowsing your music collection.When you're listening to music and the screen display turns off, press POWER toturn the screen back on and control the music playback directly on the Lockscreen.78 EntertainmentOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-78.png)
![Creating and working with playlistsPersonalize your music experience by creating music playlists. Make a playlistcontaining just your favorite songs or create one to match your mood for the day.You can make as many playlists as you like.1. Open the Music app.2. Swipe to the Playlists tab.3. Tap , and then enter a playlist name.4. To add songs, tap beside the title text box, browse your music collection,and then tap a song to add. Repeat this step to add more songs.5. You can also:Rearrange songs Press and hold next to the song title you want tomove, and then drag it to its new position.Delete songs Select the songs you want to remove from the playlist.Change playlistnameType the new name of the playlist in the title text box.6. Tap Save.To edit a playlist you've created, swipe to the Playlists tab on the Music app's mainscreen. Tap a playlist to open it, and then tap > Edit playlist.Playing the songs in a playlist1. Open the Music app.2. Swipe to the Playlists tab.3. Tap a playlist, and then tap the song you want to play first.The song starts playing on the Now playing tab.Deleting playlistsThe Recently played and the Recently added playlists can't be deleted.1. Open the Music app.2. Swipe to the Playlists tab.3. You can:§Press and hold the playlist you want to delete, and then tap Delete playlist.§Tap > Delete playlists to remove several playlists.79 EntertainmentOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-79.png)
![Adding a song to the queueWhile playing a song, you can also browse other tracks stored on HTC One max. Adda song or an album to the queue so it plays when the current playlist has finishedplaying.1. While a song is playing, browse for other tracks.2. Do any of the following:§Browse for the album or playlist that you want, press and hold it, and thentap Add to queue.§Browse for an artist or song, and then tap > Add to queue.The songs you've added appear on the Queue tab.Updating album covers and artist photosTo save on data usage, you might want to connect to a Wi-Fi network whenupdating your album covers and artist photos. In Music settings, select Wi-Fi only.1. Open the Music app.2. Swipe to the Artists or Albums tab.3. Tap > Update artist photos or Update album art.If you want HTC One max to automatically check and update your music collection,tap on the Music app's main screen, and then tap Settings. Select Album art andArtist photos.Setting a song as a ringtonePick a song from your Music library and set it as your ringtone or as ringtone for afavorite contact.1. Open the Music app.2. Play the song that you want to set as a ringtone.3. Tap > Set as ringtone.4. Tap Phone ringtone or Contact ringtone. If you select Contact ringtone, choosethe contacts you want to associate the ringtone with.80 EntertainmentOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-80.png)
![Trimming an MP3 ringtoneUse the Music app's ringtone trimmer if you want to set only a part of the song asringtone.1. When you find the song that you want, tap > Set as ringtone > Trim theringtone.2. Drag the trim sliders to the part where you want the ringtone to begin andend. For a more precise trimming, tap the left or right arrow buttons. Time markersindicate where you are on the song.3. When you're done trimming, tap Set as.4. Choose whether to set your trimmed song as your Phone ringtone or Contactringtone.You can see your new ringtone in the phone settings. Go to Settings > Sound >Ringtone.Viewing song lyricsLove a song so much that you want to sing along? HTC One max gives your music anextra kick with song lyrics and cool music visualizations.To save on data usage, connect to a Wi-Fi network when downloading lyrics. InMusic settings, select Wi-Fi only.1. Open the Music app.2. Browse to the song you want to play and tap it.3. Swipe to the Visualizer tab to view the lyrics. Song lyrics appear onscreen ifcontent has been successfully downloaded. Want a different visual for your music? Tap > Scene and select a scene. If youwant the scene to change for every song, select Random.4. Tap the screen to display the lyrics in full screen.5. To jump to another part of the song, tap the screen to make the progress barappear. Press and drag your finger across the progress bar, or press and hold or .6. To scroll through the lyrics, swipe up or down on the screen.Not all languages are supported.81 EntertainmentOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-81.png)
![Looking up related music infoSoundHound can find info about the song you're listening to. You can look up thelyrics, learn about the artist's tour dates, and more.While a song is playing, tap > Get info.Finding music videos on YouTubeIt's easy to find music videos of the song you’re listening to on YouTube®.On the Now playing screen, tap > Search > YouTube.TVEnjoying TV with HTC One maxThe TV app makes HTC One max a key part of your entertainment experience. The TVapp lets you easily tune into your preferred shows, get reminded when your favoriteshow is on, see what shows are coming up, and more.Discover current and upcoming programs with the intelligent electronic programguide (EPG) that learns your viewing habits and suggests shows you might like. TheTV app can also remember more than one EPG, so if you have more than one serviceprovider, you can get reminders for any of them.EPG information is only available for some countries.Setting up the TV appMake sure that you have an Internet connection before you set up the EPG.1. Open the TV app.2. Tap Next.3. Select your location, and then tap Next.Depending on your location, you may be asked to enter your postal code orselect your region.4. Choose your TV service provider, and then tap Next. Your cable or service provider may not be supported by the TV app.5. Select the channels included in your cable package, and then tap Next.82 EntertainmentOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-82.png)
![6. Select your video on demand services, and then tap Next. The available video on demand services depend on your location.7. Tap next to your favorite shows. If you don't find your favorite shows in thelist, tap , enter the show's name, and then tap .8. Tap Finish.Using the EPGUse the TV app's EPG (electronic program guide) to check what's showing on yourTV, view show details, or schedule TV reminders.You need to set up a remote before using the TV app. See Setting up your remotecontrol on page 85.1. Open the TV app.2. Do one of the following:§Tap a thumbnail to check the show's title, cast, and synopsis.§Tap to watch the show or movie on your TV.§Press and hold a thumbnail to see the options menu.§Tap to change the type of shows you want to display on the EPG or toview the channel guide.To make changes to your EPG settings, add remotes, and more, tap > Settings.Adding another EPGIf you have more than one TV service provider, you can add additional EPGs to the TVapp and easily switch between them on the HTC One max. The TV app is designed onthe concept of Rooms. For each Room you can add one EPG and one remote.§You can only set up another EPG for a TV service provider from the same locationor country. When you change the location or country, previously created EPGs andremotes will be deleted.§There is a limit to the number of Rooms you can add. When you reach themaximum number, you'll need to remove one before you can add another.1. Open the TV app.2. On the TV app main screen, tap > Settings > Rooms.3. Tap and enter a name for the new Room.83 EntertainmentOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-83.png)
![4. With Create a new room selected, tap Next. If you want to duplicate an existing EPG, select the Room with the EPG you want tocopy.5. Follow the onscreen instructions to setup the EPG.To switch between EPGs, tap on the main screen of the TV app.Editing, renaming, or removing a Room1. Open the TV app.2. Tap > Settings > Rooms.3. Tap a Room to hide or show channels, tag your favorite channels, and more.If you want to rename or remove the Room, tap while viewing the Room editor, andtap the option you want.Scheduling TV programsWhether your favorite show is airing in the next hour or next weekend, you'll nevermiss it when you set a reminder in the TV app. The Calendar app will notify you whenyour favorite show is about to start.1. Open the TV app.2. Tap a thumbnail of a program that interests you.3. Do one of the following:§For programs that are part of a series, tap an episode under Upcoming, andthen tap Remind me to add a reminder for that show.§For programs such as movies or sports events, tap Remind me under theUpcoming to add a reminder for a particular viewing time.The Reminder set icon appears next to the scheduled program.Before the show starts, you'll receive an upcoming event notification. Tap thenotification and then tap the link and open it in the TV app to view the show details.If you want to check what shows you scheduled, tap > My Picks. Then go to theScheduled tab.If you want to receive reminders for future episodes of a TV series, tap Add series.84 EntertainmentOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-84.png)
![Watching on demand videosAdd on-demand services to the TV app to enjoy available movies and TV showsanytime you want.§Most on-demand movies and TV shows can be purchased or rented from yourvideo service provider.§You may need to download the on demand service app first from Google Play.1. Open the TV app.2. Tap , select Movies, TV Programs, or Sports, and then go to the On demandtab.3. Tap a thumbnail to view details about the program.4. Do one of the following:§For programs that are part of a series, go to the On demand tab and selectan episode. Then tap the video on demand service that you want to use towatch the show.§For programs such as movies or sports events, tap the video on demandservice that you want to use to watch the show.To add or remove video on demand services, tap > Settings > On Demand.Setting up your remote controlTired of shuffling your TV, set top box, and home theater system remote controlswhile watching TV? You can combine them into one remote.§Make sure you have created a Room. By default, your first Room will be called "TVRoom". See Adding another EPG on page 83 to add more Rooms.§Make sure HTC One max has an Internet connection.1. Open the TV app.2. Tap to select the Room you want to create a remote for.3. Tap > Start.4. Select the devices you want to control with your remote, and then tap Next. The TV option can't be deselected.5. Select the brand of your TV, and then tap Next.6. Make sure your TV is off, and then tap Next.85 EntertainmentOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-85.png)
![7. Point HTC One max towards the TV and tap the blinking button on the screen.8. Tap Yes if HTC One max was able to turn on your TV, and then follow theonscreen instructions to continue setting up the other devices. §If the TV didn't turn on, tap No. HTC One max will try another remotecontrol profile.§If a matching remote control profile isn't found, you'll need to manually setup the remote control.Customizing the remote control buttonsAre the predefined buttons not to your liking? You can change any button.It is recommended that you do not change Number pad buttons to avoid conflictwith the EPG.1. Open the TV app.2. Tap > > Button setup.3. Tap a button to configure. Red buttons (except for the Record button) have not been configured.4. Align the IR port on HTC One max with the IR port on your device's remotecontrol. Your HTC One max and your device's remote control should be lessthan 5 cm apart.5. On your device's remote control, press and hold the button you want to add toHTC One max.6. Tap the blinking onscreen button to test the button.7. Tap Yes to finish setting up the button. If you tap No, you'll be prompted to try again.8. Press until you exit the Button setup mode.Controlling your TV with HTC One max1. Open the TV app.2. Tap .3. Do any of the following:Turn the TV, set top box, orhome theater system on or offOn the Power & input tab, tap the On, Off,On/Off button under the device name.Change the input source forthe TV or home theater systemOn the Power & input tab, tap the Inputbutton under the device name.86 EntertainmentOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-86.png)
![Change channels, adjust ormute the volume, and moreGo to the Ch/Vol tab.Enter channel numbers directly Go to the Number pad tab.Switch between recentlywatched channelsOn the Number pad tab, tap . You can alsoswitch to a recently watched channel in theNotifications panel.Access the playback controls Go to the Ch/Vol tab.To automatically turn on the display when you pick up HTC One max while usingthe TV app, select the Auto Wake option in > Settings.Controlling your TV from the Notifications panelGet a call while watching TV? You can easily use HTC One max to mute the TV andmore.1. Slide open the Notifications panel.2. Tap the controls to mute the TV, switch channels, and more.87 EntertainmentOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-87.png)
![Wireless mediaConnecting to your home entertainment systemWant to make your HTC One max experience bigger and louder? Share your videos,music, and more to external devices through DLNA, HTC Media Link HD, Miracast™, orA2DP (Bluetooth) with a simple gesture.Some devices may need to be paired before you can share to them.About HTC Media Link HDYou can plug in HTC Media Link HD to any TV with HDMI port, and use it to displaycontent wirelessly to your TV.HTC Media Link HD is sold separately.Easy to set up and useWith just a three-finger swipe, connect HTC One max to HTC Media Link HD and shareon the big screen.Multitask with dual-screen displayHTC Media Link HD gives you dual-screen display when you're:§Viewing a video in Gallery§Playing music in the HTC Music appWhile you're playing media on the big screen, you can multitask and do other thingssuch as take calls, browse the Web, or send email on HTC One max.Turns your TV into a digital photo frameUse the TV screen saver feature to store up to 30 photos from HTC One max on HTCMedia Link HD, and display them as a slideshow on your TV.To find out more about setting up HTC Media Link HD and using it with HTC One max,refer to the HTC Media Link HD user guide.88 EntertainmentOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-88.png)
![Sharing your media on DLNA devicesIf you'll be using a DLNA compliant TV or audio system, refer to its documentationon how to connect it to your home network.1. Connect HTC One max to your home network via Wi-Fi.2. Open the Gallery or Music app.3. Locate the media stored on HTC One max that you want to share, and then tapit.4. Swipe up with three fingers to show the Media output screen.5. Choose the device on your network where you want to play the media.6. Once connected to the other device, tap the onscreen controls to controlplayback, adjust the volume, and more.For more information about DLNA, visit www.dlna.org.89 EntertainmentOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-89.png)
![StorageTypes of storageWant to know what types of storage you can use for your apps, data, and files?HTC One max has these storage types:PhonestorageThis storage combines both the internal storage, where apps, email, data,and text messages are stored, and the file storage, where photos, videos,and music files are kept.If you are running out of phone storage, see Making more storage spaceon page 91 for some tips on how to free up space.StoragecardUse a storage card for storing more files. You can also set apps such asCamera to store directly to the card.USBstorageWhen you plug in an external USB storage device (such as a USB flashdrive or an SD card reader), you can view photos and videos stored onthe device right from Gallery and play songs stored on the device inMusic. You can also open PDFs and edit Office documents.You need a special cable to connect HTC One max and a USB storagedevice. HTC One max supports USB storage devices (except portablehard drives) up to 64 GB.Copying files to or from HTC One maxYou can copy your music, photos, and other files to HTC One max.Save and close your files before copying them from your computer toHTC One max, or vice versa.1. Connect HTC One max to the computer using the supplied USB cable. You'll seeoptions for viewing or importing files on the computer screen.2. Choose to view files.3. Copy the files from your computer to HTC One max, or vice versa.4. After copying the files, disconnect HTC One max from the computer.90 StorageOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-90.png)
![Making more storage spaceAs you use HTC One max, you'll accumulate data and fill its storage capacity overtime. Here are some tips on how to increase storage space.Run the storage wizardEasily free up space in the phone storage by cleaning the application cache,uninstalling apps, and changing settings so that only the most recent data is kept. InSettings, tap Storage > Make more space.Store files in Google DrivePhotos, email attachments, and other documents can be stored in Google Drive™ andaccessed anywhere you are. You can set the Camera app to automatically uploadphotos to Google Drive.Google Drive is a third-party app and is not provided by or associated with HTCCorporation.Manage photos and videos§Set the Camera app to automatically upload to a photo-sharing site or onlinestorage. When you reach the storage limit, just delete all your photos. You canretrieve them from the photo-sharing site or online storage when needed.Using data services while uploading photos and videos may be costly. You maywant to connect to Wi-Fi or disable auto upload of camera shots if you have alimited data plan.§After taking continuous camera shots, keep only the best shot and discard therest.§After editing a photo or trimming a video, the original file is kept. You can deleteoriginal files or move them to online storage or to your computer.§If you are only sending videos through MMS, use a lower resolution. High-resolution video takes up more space. In Camera settings, tap Video Quality tochange the resolution.Back up apps dataKeep only the most recent data from apps on HTC One max. You can back upcalendars, contacts, and bookmarks or export text messages, and personaldictionaries.Disable some appsApps, even if not used often, may be running in the background and downloadingdata into the phone storage. If the app cannot be removed, you can disable it. InSettings, tap Apps and then swipe to All. Select the app you want to disable, and thentap Disable.91 StorageOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-91.png)
![Encrypting data on HTC One maxYou can encrypt data such as your online accounts, settings, music files and othermedia. After encryption, you will need to enter the screen lock PIN or password toturn on your phone and access the data.Phone storage encryption§Set a lock screen PIN or password before encrypting your data.§Fully charge the battery and keep HTC One max connected to the power adapterduring encryption. The encryption process takes about an hour.§You cannot undo encryption. If you want to return to an unencrypted phone, youmust perform a factory reset.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Storage.2. Tap Phone storage encryption.3. Tap Encrypt.4. Enter the lock screen PIN or password, and tap Next.5. Tap Encrypt.Encryption starts and the progress is displayed. The phone may restart a few times.When the encryption process is complete, enter your PIN or password.Storage card encryptionYou can encrypt files on your storage card to protect your files. Storage cardencryption doesn't reformat or erase your card. Storage card files encrypted on thephone can be used only on the phone.§Set a lock screen PIN or password before encrypting your data.§Fully charge the battery and keep HTC One max connected to the power adapterduring encryption.§Only files added to the storage card after enabling encryption will be encrypted.Existing files will not be encrypted.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Storage.2. Tap File level SD card encryption3. Tap Encrypt.92 StorageOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-92.png)
![4. Enter the lock screen PIN or password, and tap Next.5. Tap Encrypt.Encryption starts and the progress is displayed. The storage card will be unavailableduring encryption.You can stop encrypting new files by clearing the File level SD card encryptionoption. Previously encrypted files will remain encrypted. To access these files, youmust enable File level SD card encryption again.93 StorageOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-93.png)
![PeopleYour contacts listThe People app lists all contacts you've stored on HTC One max and from onlineaccounts you're logged in to. Use the People app to easily manage communicationswith people that matter to you.1. Open the People app. 2. On your contacts list, you can:§View your profile and edit your contact information.§Create, edit, find, or send contacts.§Tap a contact photo to find ways to quickly connect with the contact.§See a notification icon when a contact has sent you new messages.To sort your contacts by their first or last name, tap > Settings > Sort contact list.Filtering your contacts listWhen your contacts list gets long, you can choose which contact accounts to show.1. On the People tab, tap .2. Choose the accounts that contain the contacts you want to display.3. Press .94 PeopleOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-94.png)
![Finding peopleSearch for contacts stored on HTC One max, your company directory if you have anExchange ActiveSync account, or social networks you've signed into.1. Open the People app.2. On the People tab, you can:§Find people in your contacts list. Tap the Search people box, and then enterthe first few letters of the contact name.§Find people on your company directory. Tap the Search people box, enterthe first few letters of the contact name, and then tap Search contacts inyour Company Directory.§Search for people you know on your social networks. Tap > Settings >Find people you know on, and then select the social networks you'resigned in to. The People app then uploads your contacts to the selectedsocial networks to help you find friends.Aside from searching for a contact by name, you can search using a contact's emailaddress or company name. On the People tab, tap > Settings > Search contactsby, and then choose a search criteria.Setting up your profileStore your personal contact information to easily send it to other people.1. Do one of the following:§On the People tab, tap My profile.§With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick settings.Tap the Me tile (or your contact name, if you've already signed in to yourGoogle account), and then tap Me or your contact name again.2. Tap Edit my contact card.3. Enter or edit your name and contact details.4. Tap (or the current photo) to change your contact photo.5. Tap Save.Aside from your contact details, your profile also shows updates you've posted onyour social networks and your online photo albums.95 PeopleOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-95.png)
![Adding a new contact1. On the People tab, tap .2. Tap the Name field, and then enter the contact name. Tap if you want to separately enter the contact's first, middle, and last name.Depending on the contact type, you may also be able to add other info such as aname suffix (for example, "Jr.").3. Select the Contact type. This determines which account the contact will syncwith. Some fields may not be available when you’re adding contacts to a SIM card.4. Enter the contact information in the fields provided.5. Tap Save.When you tap the added contact on your contacts list, you'll see the contactinformation and your exchange of messages and calls. Depending on the informationthat you've added to the contact (such as an email address), you'll also be able to seethe contact's social network updates, events, and photos.How do I add an extension number to a contact number?While creating a new contact in People, you can add an extension number totheir number so you can skip the voice prompts when calling.1. After entering the number of the main line, do one of the following:§Tap P(,) to insert a pause before the extension number is dialedautomatically. To make the pause longer, tap P(,) again.§Tap W(;) to be prompted to confirm the extension number.2. Enter the extension number.96 PeopleOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-96.png)
![Editing a contact’s informationSocial network contacts cannot be edited.1. On the People tab, press and hold the contact, and then tap Edit contact.2. Enter the new information.3. Tap Save.Getting in touch with a contact1. Open the People app.2. Tap a contact's photo (not the name), and then choose how you want to get intouch with that contact. For more ways of getting in touch with your contact, tap an icon below the contactphoto.Importing or copying contactsImporting contacts from your micro SIM card1. On the People tab, tap > Manage contacts.2. Tap Import/Export contacts > Import from SIM card.3. If you have a Google or Exchange ActiveSync account, tap the type for theimported contacts.97 PeopleOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-97.png)
![4. Select the contacts you want to import.5. Tap Save.Importing a contact from an Exchange ActiveSync account1. On the People tab, enter the contact's name or email address in the search box.2. Tap Search contacts in your Company Directory.3. Tap the name of the contact you want copied to HTC One max.4. Tap to import the contact.Copying contacts from one account to another1. On the People tab, tap > Manage contacts.2. Tap Copy contacts, and then choose a contact type or online account to copyfrom. Contacts from your social network accounts may not be copied.3. Select a contact type or account you want to save to.Merging contact informationAvoid duplicate entries by merging contact information from different sources, suchas your social network accounts, into one contact.Accepting contact link suggestionsWhen HTC One max finds contacts that can be merged, you’ll see a link notificationwhen you open the People app.1. On the People tab, tap the Link suggestion notification when available. You'll seea list of suggested contacts to merge.2. Choose the contacts you want to merge.If you don't want to receive contact link suggestions, on the People tab, tap >Settings. Clear the Suggest contact link option.98 PeopleOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-98.png)
![Manually merging contact information1. On the People tab, tap the name of the contact (not the icon or photo) youwant to link.2. Tap > Link.3. You can:§Under Suggest links, tap to link the contact to an account.§Under Add contact, tap one of the options to link to another contact.Breaking the link1. On the People tab, tap the name of the contact (not the icon or photo) whoselink you want to break.2. Tap > Link.3. Under the Linked contacts section, tap beside an account to break thelink.Sending contact information1. On the People tab, do one of the following:To send Do thisSomeone's contactinformationPress and hold the name of the contact (not the iconor photo), and then tap Send contact as vCard.Your contactinformationPress and hold My profile, and then tap Send myprofile.2. Choose how you want to send the vCard.3. Select the type of information you want to send.4. Tap Send.Sending multiple contact cards1. On the People tab, tap > Send contacts.2. Select the contacts whose contact information you want to share3. Tap Send.4. Choose how you want to send the contact cards.99 PeopleOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-99.png)
![Contact groupsOrganize your friends, family, and colleagues into groups so you can quickly send amessage or email to everyone in the group. We’ve also set up the Frequent group toautomatically add the contacts you dial or get calls from the most.HTC One max also syncs with groups you've created in your Google Account.Creating a group1. On the Groups tab, tap .2. Enter a name for the group, and then tap > Add contact to group.3. Select the contacts you want to add, and then tap Save.4. When your group is complete, tap Save.Sending a message or email to a groupYou will be charged for each text message sent. For example, if you send amessage to a group of five people, you will be charged for five messages.1. On the Groups tab, tap the group you want to send a message or email to.2. Go to the Group action tab.3. Choose if you want to send a group message or group email.Editing a group1. On the Groups tab, press and hold the group, and then tap Edit group.2. You can:§Change the group name. You can only change the name for groups thatyou have created.§Add more contacts to the group. Tap > Add contact to group.Contact not in your list? On the Groups tab, tap the name of the group where youwant to add the contact, and then tap > Create a new contact.§Rearrange the group members. Press and hold at the end of thecontact’s name, and then drag it to its new position.§Select the contacts you want to remove from the group.3. Tap Save.100 PeopleOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-100.png)
![Managing your contact groups1. On the Groups tab, tap > Edit groups.2. You can:§Rearrange the contact groups. Press and hold at the end of the groupname, and then drag it to its new position.§Select the contact groups you want to remove.3. Tap Save.101 PeopleOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-101.png)
![EmailGmailViewing your Gmail InboxAll your received email messages are delivered to your Inbox.1. Open the Gmail app.2. Do any of the following from your Inbox.§Tap an email message (not the sender image or letter tile) to read, forward,or reply to the message.§Tap Inbox at the top bar to switch to your other Gmail™ account or todisplay drafts, sent messages, or other email labels.§Tap the sender image or letter tile to select one or more messages orconversations. You can then tap the onscreen buttons at the top bar toarchive, delete, or mark the selected messages or conversations.Get help in using Gmail by tapping > Help.102 EmailOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-102.png)
![Sending an email message in Gmail1. In the inbox of the Gmail account you want to use, tap (or tap >Compose).2. Fill in one or more recipients. Want to loop in more recipients in a carbon copy (Cc) or blind carbon copy (Bcc)of the email message? Tap > Add Cc/Bcc.3. Enter the email subject, and then compose your message.4. If you want to attach a photo or video, tap , and then tap the attachment type.5. Tap to send.Replying to or forwarding email messages in Gmail1. In the Gmail inbox, tap the email message or conversation.2. To reply to the sender, tap . Or, tap and choose whether to Reply all orForward.3. Do one of the following:§If you're replying to the sender or you selected Reply all, enter your replymessage.§If you selected Forward, specify the message recipients.Tap Respond inline if you want to interleave your new message with the receivedemail. But this removes any attachments or formatting in the original emailmessage.4. Tap to send.103 EmailOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-103.png)
![MailChecking your mailThe Mail app is where you read, send, and organize email messages from one or moreemail accounts that you’ve set up on HTC One max.1. Open the Mail app. The inbox of one of your email accounts appears.2. Do any of the following:§Tap an email message to read.§To switch between email accounts, tap the bar that shows the current emailaccount, and then tap another account.§To display email messages in another mail folder, tap > Folder, and thentap the folder you want to view.§To view email messages from all your accounts, tap the bar that shows thecurrent email account, and then tap All accounts.§To change an email account's settings, select the account and then tap >Settings.Organizing your inboxDo you have a big pile of email messages in your inbox? Organize your emailmessages into tabs and quickly find the messages you want.1. Switch to the email account that you want to use.2. In the inbox, tap > Filters.3. Select the tabs you want to add to the inbox, and then tap Done.4. Swipe to the added tab to check your email messages.104 EmailOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-104.png)
![Sending an email message1. Open the Mail app.2. Switch to the email account that you want to use.3. Tap .4. Fill in one or more recipients. Want to loop in more recipients in a carbon copy (Cc) or blind carbon copy (Bcc)of the email message? Tap > Show Cc/Bcc.5. Enter the subject, and then compose your message.6. Do any of the following:§Add an attachment. Tap and then choose what you want to attach.§Set the priority for an important message. Tap > Set priority.7. Tap . To save the email as draft and send it later, tap > Save. Or press .Resuming a draft email message1. In an email account inbox, tap > Folder > Drafts.2. Tap the message.3. When you finish editing the message, tap .Reading and replying to an email message1. Open the Mail app.2. Switch to the email account you want to use.3. In the email account inbox, tap the email message or conversation you want toread. If you want to read a particular message inside an email conversation, tap toexpand the conversation, and then tap the email message.4. Tap Reply or Reply All. Tap for more actions for the email.Saving an image in an email messageWhile viewing an email message, press and hold an embedded image, and then tapSave. You'll find the saved image under the Downloads folder.You can also copy the image to the clipboard or set it as your wallpaper.105 EmailOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-105.png)
![Saving an email message in the Tasks appSave an email message in your Tasks list so you can remind yourself when to reply.1. In an email account inbox, press and hold the email message, and then tap Saveas task.2. Enter the task details, and then tap Save.Managing email messagesThe Mail app provides easy ways to sort, move, or delete your email messages.Sorting email messagesCustomize how you sort your email messages.In an email account inbox, tap > Sort, and select from the sorting options.To quickly scroll through the message list based on the sorting option you'veselected, press and hold two fingers on any email message, and then drag upwardor downward.Moving email messages to another folder1. Switch to the email account you want to use.2. Select the email messages you want to move. To select all, select one email message first, and then tap > Select all.3. Tap Move to, and then select a folder.Deleting email messages1. Switch to the email account you want to use.2. Select the email messages you want to delete. To select all, select one email message first, and then tap > Select all.3. Tap Delete.Searching email messages1. Tap .2. If you want to refine or filter your search, tap , check the search options, andthen tap OK. For example, you can focus the search on a part of an email orfilter email messages that have attachments or tagged as high priority.106 EmailOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-106.png)
![3. In the search box, enter the words you want to search for.4. Tap a result to open the email message.Searching for emails from a contactDo you remember the sender, but can't find a particular email from him or her?1. Switch to the email account you want to use.2. Press and hold an email message from a contact.3. Tap Search the mail from the sender. A list of email messages from that contactappears.Working with Exchange ActiveSync emailEnjoy the powerful email features of Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync right onHTC One max. Flag important email messages, set your out of the office reply, or sendinvites to your next team meeting while you're on the go.Flagging an email1. Switch to your Exchange ActiveSync account.2. While viewing the inbox, tap the flag icon that appears beside an email messageor conversation. To flag an email message inside a conversation, tap to expand the conversation,and then tap the flag icon of the email message.Setting your Out of the office status1. Switch to your Exchange ActiveSync account.2. Tap > Out of the office.3. Tap your current office status, and then select Out of the office.4. Set the dates and times.5. Enter the auto-reply message.6. If you want a different auto-reply message for recipients outside yourorganization, tap the Send replies to external senders option, and then enter theauto-reply message in the box.7. Tap Save.Sending a meeting request1. Switch to your Exchange ActiveSync account.2. Tap > New meeting invitation.3. Enter the meeting details.4. Tap Save. Or tap Send if you've invited people to the meeting.107 EmailOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-107.png)
![Adding an email accountSet up additional email accounts such as another Microsoft Exchange ActiveSyncaccount or an account from a Web-based email service or email provider.If you're adding a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync or a POP3/IMAP email account,ask your network administrator or email service provider for additional emailsettings that you may need.1. Open the Mail app.2. Tap > Add account.3. Select an email account type from the list of email providers. Otherwise, tapOther (POP3/IMAP).4. Enter the email address and password for your email account, and then tapNext. Some email accounts allow you to set the sync schedule. By default, HTC One maxuses Smart Sync to save battery power. See What is Smart Sync? on page 108.5. Enter a name for your email account, and then tap Finish setup.What is Smart Sync?Smart Sync automatically extends the sync time the longer the Mail app is inactive.Set your email account to Smart Sync when you don't need to check new emailmessages frequently. Smart Sync helps save battery power.If you want to receive email messages as they arrive, select another peak and off-peaksync schedule in the email account's Sync, Send & Receive settings.108 EmailOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-108.png)
![Travel and mapsLocation settingsTurning location services on or offIn order to find your location on HTC One max, you need to enable location sources.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Location.2. Select or clear the location sources you want to turn on or off.Google MapsAbout Google MapsGoogle Maps™ lets you track your current location, view real-time traffic situations,and receive detailed directions to your destination.It also provides a search tool where you can locate places of interest or an address ona map, or view locations at street level.§To find your location with Google Maps, you need to enable location sources.§The Google Maps app does not cover every country or city.Getting around mapsWhen you open Google Maps, you can easily find your location on the map or checkout nearby places by panning and zooming in and out on the map.1. Open the Maps app.2. Tap to show your current location. The blue marker or shows yourcurrent location on the map.109 Travel and mapsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-109.png)
![3. Navigate the map using finger gestures.§Slide your finger on any direction to pan.§Double-tap the map or slide two fingers apart over an area to zoom in.§Double-tap the map with two fingers or slide two fingers together over anarea to zoom out.§Press and hold an area with two fingers and then drag your fingers in acircular motion to rotate the map.§Press and hold an area with two fingers and then swipe down to see anangled view of the map. Swipe up to return to overhead view.4. Tap to turn Compass mode on. In Compass mode, the map orients itselfdepending on the direction you're facing. To exit Compass mode, tap . Add a map view to see more information overlaid on the map. Tap , and then tapa map view such as Traffic or Public transit. To remove the map view, tap it againon the map view list.Searching for a locationUse Google Maps to search for a location, such as an address or a type of business orestablishment (for example, museums).1. Open the Maps app.2. Tap the search box and then enter the place you want to search for.110 Travel and mapsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-110.png)
![3. Tap the Enter key on the keyboard or tap a suggested search item. The firstlocation on the search appears with a place marker and its info sheet displaysat the bottom of the screen. All other search results are indicated by a red dotor a smart map icon.§To check the next or previous location on the search, swipe the info sheet left orright.§To view the search results list, tap .4. Tap the info sheet to check the address, get directions, see the location in StreetView (if available), and more.To clear the map and search another location, swipe down the info sheet (if it'sexpanded), and then tap .Finding services near youQuickly search for banks, gas stations, grocery stores, and other services nearby.1. Open the Maps app.2. Tap to show your current location.3. Tap the search box and then press to hide the keyboard.4. Tap one of the service icons (such as grocery or bank) or tap to selectother services.5. Tap the info sheet to check the address, get directions, see the location in StreetView (if available), and more.111 Travel and mapsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-111.png)
![Checking the details of a location1. Open the Maps app.2. Press and hold a location on the map. A place marker opens and the location'sinfo sheet appears at the bottom of the screen.3. Tap the place marker or the info sheet to call, get directions, view the place inStreet View, and more.Exploring places and activities near youGoogle Maps lets you find places of interest where you can dine, sleep, shop, andmore.This feature may not be available for certain countries and locales.1. Open the Maps app.2. Tap to show your current location.3. Tap the search box and then press to hide the keyboard.4. Tap the Explore card to open the Explore screen.5. Tap an activity, and then tap a place of interest from the list. The place isdisplayed on the map.6. Tap the info sheet to check the address, get directions, see the location in StreetView (if available), and more. Scroll down the screen to view more information. To find another place or activity, press twice to return to the Explore screen.Getting directionsGet detailed directions to your destination. Google Maps provides travel directions bycar, public transit, bike, or foot.1. Open the Maps app.2. Tap .3. Choose how you want to get to your destination.4. Use your current location as starting point, or tap My location to enter yourstarting point or select a location from your search history.5. Tap Choose destination, and then enter or select your destination. If you're taking public transit, tap to set the date and time of travel, or tapOptions to set your route preferences.112 Travel and mapsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-112.png)
![6. Tap a route or transit option to view the directions on the map. You'll also seethe travel duration on the info sheet at the bottom of the screen.7. Tap the info sheet to view the directions in a list.When you’re finished viewing or following the directions, tap to reset the map.Your destination is automatically saved in the Google Maps history.HTC CarOn the road with HTC CarNow when you drive, you can easily use HTC One max to reach your destination, keepyou entertained, and help you stay in touch with the people that matter to you.Access music, phone calls, maps, and more with HTC Car.1. HTC Car instantly launches when you mount HTC One max in HTC Car Kit.2. Swipe up or down to see what you can do in HTC Car.When using HTC Car, return to the main screen from any other screen by pressing.When you remove HTC One max from HTC Car Kit, HTC Car will automatically exit.You can also manually close HTC Car by pressing from the main screen.Using voice commands in HTC CarUse your voice to control HTC Car.1. In HTC Car, tap the screen with three fingers to activate the voice commandmode. You can also tap Speak on the main screen in HTC Car.2. Do one of the following:Call someone Say "Call [person's name in phonebook]"Play music Say "Play [song title, album, artist name,or genre]"Play the radio Say "Listen to [song title, artist name, orgenre]"Find something on themapSay "Find [name of place, address, type ofplace]"113 Travel and mapsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-113.png)
![Playing music in HTC Car1. In HTC Car, tap Music.2. Do one of the following:§Swipe left or right to browse by category.§Tap to search your collection.3. Tap an album, song, or playlist to listen to it.You can also play music by tapping Speak on the main screen and saying what youwant to hear. For example, say "Play Beethoven's 5th".Listening to Internet radio with TuneInRight from HTC Car, enjoy listening to Internet radio stations with TuneIn.1. In HTC Car, tap Internet Radio.2. Do one of the following:§Browse for available stations by category.§Tap to enter and search for stations by keyword such as artist name ortopic.3. Tap a station to start listening to it.§You can also find Internet radio stations by tapping Speak on the main screen andsaying what you want to hear. For example, say "Listen to comedy".§To ensure smooth playback, TuneIn preloads audio data (buffering) onHTC One max before playing your selected station. To set the amount of audio topreload, tap and choose a buffer time.114 Travel and mapsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-114.png)
![Finding your way with HTC CarHTC Car helps you to find your way to where you want to go. Easily find nearbyrestaurants and more on your weekends. HTC Car gives you the information you needso you won't get lost.Exploring what's around youFeeling adventurous? With just a few taps, you can find interesting places around youquickly.1. In HTC Car, tap Navigation.2. Do one of the following:§Tap a category.§Tap to enter your own search keywords.You can also find places by tapping Speak on the main screen and saying what youare looking for. For example say "Find parking".Finding places in HTC Car1. In HTC Car, tap Navigation.2. Do one of the following:Search for a new place 1. Tap .2. Type what you are looking for, and tap.Look up a previously searchedplaceTap Previous.Get directions for an upcomingevent in Calendar1. Tap Appointments.2. Tap an upcoming appointment from thelist.3. Tap an item to go to the map.Staying connected to your contactsJust because you're driving doesn't mean you have to be isolated from the rest of theworld. With HTC Car, you can take calls, make calls, and get notifications.Handling incoming calls in HTC CarWhen you receive an incoming call, you can easily answer or decline.§If you hear a voice prompt, say "yes" or "no" to answer or decline a call.§Tap Answer or Decline.115 Travel and mapsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-115.png)
![Making phone calls in HTC Car§Tap Dialer to open the dialpad.§Tap People and then browse a category or search by entering a name.§Tap Speak and say "Call" and the person's name. For example, say "CallJennifer Singer".Customizing HTC Car§To change the default behavior of HTC Car, tap Settings.§To add more apps to HTC Car, tap and select an app.116 Travel and mapsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-116.png)
![Google Play and other appsGetting appsGetting apps from Google PlayGoogle Play is the place to go to find new apps for HTC One max. Choose from a widevariety of free and paid apps ranging from productivity apps, entertainment, togames.§A Google Wallet™ payment service is required to purchase a paid app. You will beasked to confirm method of payment when you purchase an app.§The name of the Play Store app may differ depending on your region.§The ability to purchase apps varies by region.Finding and installing an appWhen you install apps and use them on HTC One max, they may require access toyour personal information or access to certain functions or settings. Download andinstall only apps that you trust.Be cautious when downloading apps that have access to functions or a significantamount of your data on HTC One max. You’re responsible for the results of usingdownloaded apps.1. Open the Play Store app.2. Browse or search for an app.3. When you find the app that you like, tap it and read its description and userreviews.4. To download or purchase the app, tap Install (for free apps) or the price button(for paid apps).5. Tap Accept. Apps sometimes get updated with improvements or bug fixes. To automaticallydownload updates, after installing the app, tap > Auto-update.To open the app, go to the All Apps screen and tap the app.117 Google Play and other appsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-117.png)
![Restoring apps from Google PlayUpgraded to a new phone, replaced a lost one, or performed a factory reset? Restoreapps that you previously downloaded.1. Open the Play Store app.2. Tap > My apps.3. Swipe to the All tab, and then tap the app you want to restore.4. Install the app.For more details, refer to the Google Play help.Downloading apps from the webYou can download apps directly from websites.Apps downloaded from websites can be from unknown sources. To help protectHTC One max and your personal data, we strongly recommend that you onlydownload from websites you trust.1. Open the browser, and then go to the website where you can download the appyou want.2. Follow the website's download instructions for the app.Before you can install the downloaded app, make sure that you've set HTC One maxto allow installation of third-party apps in Settings > Security > Unknown sources.After installing the app, make sure to go back to Settings > Security and clear theUnknown sources option. This can help protect your phone from installing insecureapps from the Web.Uninstalling an appIf you no longer need an app that you've downloaded and installed, you can easilyuninstall it.Most of the preloaded apps cannot be uninstalled.From the All Apps screen, press and hold the app you want to remove, and then dragit to Uninstall.If you purchased an app in Play Store, you can uninstall it for a refund within alimited time. To know more about the refund policy for paid apps, refer to theGoogle Play help.118 Google Play and other appsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-118.png)
![Essential appsUsing the ClockGet more from the Clock app than just the regular date and time. Use HTC One maxas a world clock to see the date and time in cities across the globe. You can also setalarms or track your time using the stopwatch or timer.Setting the date and time manually1. Open the Clock app.2. On the World Clock tab, tap > Local time settings.3. Clear Automatic date & time and Automatic time zone, and then set the timezone, date, and time as required.To display military time, choose the Use 24-hour format option.Setting an alarmYou can set up one or more alarms.1. Open the Clock app.2. On the Alarms tab, select the check box of an alarm and then tap that alarm.3. Under Set alarm, use the scroll wheels to set the alarm time.4. If you want the alarm for multiple days, tap Repeat.5. Tap Done.§To turn off an alarm, clear the check box of that alarm.§If you need to set more than three alarms, tap .Checking WeatherUse the Weather app and widget to check the current weather and weather forecastsfor the next few days. In addition to your current location, you can view weatherforecasts for other cities around the globe.1. Open the Weather app. You'll see the weather for different cities, includingwhere you are.2. Tap a city to view weather information.3. Swipe to the Hourly and Forecast tabs to view the forecast in your selectedlocation.4. To check the weather in other cities, tap , and then select the city you want.5. To add more cities, tap and then enter the location.Your settings in the Weather app also control the weather information that is shownin the Clock and Calendar.119 Google Play and other appsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-119.png)
![Viewing the CalendarUse the Calendar app to view your events, meetings, and appointments. If you'vesigned into your online accounts, related events will also appear in Calendar.1. Open the Calendar app.2. Tap , and then choose a calendar view.In any calendar view, return to the current date by tapping the today button beside.Month viewIn month view, you will see markers on days that have events. Upcoming events forthe day are also shown at the bottom of the screen.§Swipe left or right across the screen to view succeeding or previous months.§Tap a day to view the events for that day.§Press and hold a day to see more options.Day and agenda viewsDay view shows your day's schedule and weather forecast for the next few days, whileagenda view gives a quick glance of all your day's events.§Swipe left or right across the screen to view succeeding or previous days.§Tap an event to view its details.§If the event is a contact's birthday or anniversary, tap it to send a greeting.Need to see the event time in another time zone? In Day view, tap > Select 2ndtime zone > Choose location, and then enter the city name.Week viewWeek view displays a chart of the events of one week.§Swipe left or right across the screen to view succeeding or previous weeks.§Tap an event (shown as colored blocks) to view its details.120 Google Play and other appsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-120.png)
![Scheduling or editing an eventYou can create or edit events on HTC One max, and also sync events with yourGoogle or Exchange ActiveSync calendars.Editing events is not supported for all accounts.1. Open the Calendar app.2. On any Calendar view, do one of the following:Create an event Tap . Tap , and then select the calendar you will add theevent to.Edit an event View an event, and then tap .3. Enter and set the event details.4. To invite contacts from your Google or Exchange ActiveSync account, tap .5. Tap Save. If you've invited people to the event, tap Send or Send update.Checking your schedule for an eventAvoid juggling multiple meetings at the same time. In Calendar, you can check yourappointments to see if a new event would conflict with your schedule.1. When creating or editing an event, tap Check calendar.2. Press and hold the event box, and then drag it to an available time slot.3. Drag the top and bottom nodes to adjust the event's time duration. You'll see amessage if there are conflicts with other scheduled events.4. Tap Done to return to the event screen, and then save your event.Choosing which calendars to show1. In any calendar view, tap > Accounts (All calendars) or Accounts (Multi-calendar).2. Select or clear an account you wish to show or hide. If you have multiple calendars under an online account, tap to select theitems to include.§Calendars are synced on HTC One max, even if they are hidden.§You can also show or hide tasks that you've created on HTC One max.121 Google Play and other appsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-121.png)
![Why aren’t my calendar events showing up?If you can't find events from your email accounts or social networks inCalendar, check whether the Calendar sync is turned on in Settings.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Accounts & sync.2. Tap an account type. If multiple accounts are supported (such asExchange ActiveSync), tap the account you want to sync.3. Select Calendar, and then tap > Sync now.Sharing an eventYou can share a calendar event as a vCalendar using Bluetooth or by sending it as afile attachment with your email or message.1. Do one of the following:§While viewing an event, tap > Share via.§In day, agenda or week view, press and hold an event and then tap Sharevia.2. Choose how you want to send the event.You can also forward accepted meeting invitations from your Exchange ActiveSynccalendar. While viewing an event, tap > Forward. Compose your email message,and then send it.Accepting or declining a meeting invitationSwitch to Invites view to see meeting invitations which you have not yet accepted ordeclined.You must set up an Exchange ActiveSync account to receive meeting invitations inCalendar.1. Open the Calendar app.2. Tap > Invites, and then tap a meeting invitation.3. Accept, decline, or tentatively accept the invitation, or propose a new time. Tap to choose from more options, such as moving the invitation to a folder.If you need to cancel an accepted meeting invitation or propose a new time, view theevent details in Calendar, and then tap Response.122 Google Play and other appsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-122.png)
![Dismissing or snoozing event remindersIf you have set at least one reminder for an event, the upcoming event icon willappear in the notifications area of the status bar to remind you.1. Slide the Notifications panel open.2. If the notification shows that there are multiple reminders, tap it to see all thereminders. You can then choose to snooze or dismiss them.3. If you see a single event notification, spread your two fingers on the notificationto expand it. You can then:§Tap Snooze or Dismiss. Or drag the notification left or right to dismiss it.§Tap Send mail to send a quick response to the meeting attendees.To edit the preset quick responses or add your own, open Calendar, and then tap > Settings > Quick response.If you don't want to dismiss or snooze the calendar reminders, press from theNotifications panel to keep them pending in the notifications area of the status bar.Fun appsWatching videos on YouTubeCheck out the latest video sensations using the YouTube app.1. Open the YouTube app.2. Browse or search for a video.3. When you find the video that you like, tap it. Want to watch the video at a later time instead? Tap > Add to Watch later. Youcan access the video again from your account profile's Watch later list.4. While watching a video, you can:§Turn HTC One max sideways to watch the video in full screen.§Tap the video screen to pause or to resume playback, or drag the slider tojump to a different part of the video.§Scroll down the video information panel to see related videos andcomments from other viewers.§Touch to minimize the video screen and browse other videos. To closethe video thumbnail, swipe it left or right.Tap the YouTube icon to return to the previous screen.123 Google Play and other appsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-123.png)
![Preloading videosSet the YouTube app to preload videos so that you can watch them withoutinterruptions. Videos are preloaded when HTC One max is being charged and isconnected to a Wi-Fi network.For more information about preloading videos, refer to the YouTube help.1. Open the YouTube app.2. Tap > Settings > Preloading.3. Select what type of videos to preload.The videos are preloading when appears on Watch later screen or on the channelyou subscribed to. The icon changes to when the videos are ready.Clearing the search history1. In the YouTube app, tap > Settings.2. Tap Search > Clear search history.Listening to FM RadioListen to your favorite radio stations using the FM Radio app.You need to connect a headset first to the audio jack of HTC One max to use FMRadio. FM Radio uses the stereo headset as the FM radio antenna.1. Open the FM Radio app. The first time you open FM Radio, it scans for local FM stations that you canlisten to.2. While you're listening to an FM station, you can:§Tap or to go to the next or previous station.§Drag the slider to tune in to a frequency on the FM band. To fine tune theradio frequency, tap or .§Tap to mark a radio station as a favorite. To see your other favorites andpreset stations, tap .3. To turn off FM Radio, tap .124 Google Play and other appsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-124.png)
![Switching to Kid ModeWorried that your kids might wander off to inappropriate web sites or mess with yourimportant work files while using HTC One max? Use Kid Mode™ to let your childrenenjoy fun and age-appropriate games and more, while helping to protect yourimportant data from accidental deletion. To learn more about Kid Mode, visit www.zoodles.com.1. Open the Kid Mode app. The first time you use Kid Mode, you need to create or sign in to your Zoodles™account.2. On the Zoodles main screen, tap the profile that you created for your child.3. Tap the icons to access games and apps, play recorded storybook readings, andmore.How can I allow my child to access an app in Kid Mode?When in Kid Mode, you can choose which apps on HTC One max your childwill have access to.1. On the Zoodles main screen, tap Parent Dashboard. You can also go to Parent Dashboard from Settings > Security > Kid Mode.2. Confirm your action with your child lock setting (either by drawing theletter Z on the screen or by entering the child's birth year).3. Under Basic Features, tap Apps. You'll see a list of apps installed onHTC One max.4. Tap the check option beside the app that you want your child to be ableto use in Zoodles.Want to receive or block incoming calls while in Kid Mode? Under BasicFeatures, tap Settings and then select or clear the Allow incoming callscheck option.Closing Kid ModeOn the Zoodles main screen, tap and then confirm your action with your child locksetting (either by drawing the letter Z on the screen or by entering the child's birthyear).125 Google Play and other appsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-125.png)
![Productivity appsKeeping track of your tasksUse the Tasks app to organize and track to do and task lists. Create tasks on yourphone or sync them with your Google and Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts.You can also see your tasks in Calendar.Creating a task1. Open the Tasks app.2. To select the task account where you want to create the task, tap .3. Tap , and then enter the task details. Tasks created under My tasks can be linked to a contact (tap ) or to a location(tap ).4. Tap Save.Managing tasks1. Go to the list that contains the task.2. In the list of tasks, you can:Mark a taskcompleteTap the check box next to the task. To view completedtasks, tap > View completed.Sort tasks 1. Tap > Sort.2. Select how you want to sort the tasks.Edit a task 1. Tap the task that you want to edit, and then tap Edit.2. Edit the task details, and then tap Save.Delete a task Press and hold the task that you want to delete, and thentap Delete.Postpone a task 1. Press and hold a task, and then tap Postpone.2. Choose how long you want to postpone the task.Move a task toanother listYou can only move the task to another list that is under thesame account.1. Press and hold the task that you want to move, and thentap Move to.2. Tap the task list where you want the task to appear.126 Google Play and other appsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-126.png)
![Managing task lists1. In the Tasks app, tap > Manage lists.2. From here, you can:Show tasks To show all tasks under a list, tap a task list.Create a list Tap , and then choose an account for the list.Lists can't be created for Microsoft Exchange ActiveSyncaccounts.Rename a list 1. Tap at the right of a list, and then tap Rename.2. Enter a new name for the list, and then tap OK.Delete a list 1. Tap at the right of a list, and then tap Delete.2. Tap OK.You cannot delete a main list.Recording voice clipsUse Voice Recorder to capture information during lectures, interviews, or even tocreate your own audio log.1. Open the Voice Recorder app.2. Hold the microphone near the sound source.3. Tap to start recording a voice clip. Voice Recorder can run in the background while you do other things onHTC One max, except when you open other apps that also use audio functions.4. Tap to stop recording.To play back the voice clip, tap .To see your recorded voice clips, tap . Press and hold a voice clip to see optionsfor sharing, setting it as a ringtone, and more.127 Google Play and other appsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-127.png)
![Internet connectionsData connectionWhen you turn on HTC One max for the first time, it will be automatically set up touse your mobile operator's data connection (if the micro SIM card is inserted).HTC One max is available in either a 3G or LTE version, depending on your regionand mobile operator. You need an LTE plan to use your operator's 4G/LTE networkfor voice calls and data services. Check with your operator for details.Turning the data connection on or offTurning your data connection off saves battery life and money on data charges.1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. Tap the Mobile data tile to turn the data connection on and off.If you don’t have the data connection turned on and you’re also not connected to aWi-Fi network, you won’t receive automatic updates to your email, social networkaccounts, and other synced information.Adding a new access pointYou can add a new Access Point Name (APN) when roaming or if you have difficultyestablishing a data connection. APNs connect HTC One max to data networks forservices such as mobile web browsing.Before you add another data connection, have the access point name and settingsfrom your mobile operator ready (including username and password if required).1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. If Mobile data is off, tap the Mobile data tile to turn it on.3. Tap . The Mobile network settings screen opens.4. Tap Access point names.5. On the APNs screen, tap > New APN.6. Enter the APN settings.7. Tap > Save.8. Select the new APN on the APNs screen.128 Internet connectionsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-128.png)
![Managing your data usageIf you're on a limited data allowance, it's important to keep track of the activities andapps that usually send and receive data, such as browsing the web, syncing onlineaccounts, and sending email or sharing status updates.Here are some other examples:§Streaming web videos and music§Tuning in to Internet radio§Playing online games§Downloading apps, maps, and files§Refreshing apps to update info and feeds§Uploading and backing up your files to your online storage account§Using HTC One max as a Wi-Fi Hotspot§Sharing your mobile data connection by USB tetheringTo help you save on data usage, connect to a Wi-Fi network whenever possible andset your online accounts and emails to sync less frequently.Turning data roaming on or offConnect to your mobile operator’s partner networks and access data services whenyou’re out of your mobile operator’s coverage area.Using data services while roaming may be costly. Check with your mobile operatorfor data roaming rates before you use data roaming.1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. If Mobile data is off, tap the Mobile data tile to turn it on.3. Tap . The Mobile network settings screen opens.4. Select or clear the Data roaming option.Select the Data roaming sound option if you’d like HTC One max to play a sound soyou’ll know when it’s connecting to a roaming network.Keeping track of your data usageMonitor your data usage to help prevent going over your monthly data allowance.Data usage measured by HTC One max may differ from, and be less than, youractual data usage.1. Go to Settings, and then under Wireless & networks, tap More.2. Tap Usage.129 Internet connectionsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-129.png)
![3. On the Mobile tab, select Limit mobile data usage and tap OK to automaticallydisable your data connection when you reach the set limit.4. Drag the upper LIMIT line to set your monthly data limit.5. Select Alert me about data usage, and then drag the lower ALERT line to set analert before you reach your monthly data limit.6. Tap Reset data usage, and then set the day of the month when your usagecycle resets. This date is usually the start of your monthly billing cycle.7. Drag the vertical line markers to see how much data you've used during aparticular time interval.If you're connecting HTC One max to another portable Wi-Fi hotspot, tap >Mobile hotspots to restrict background data from downloading that may incurextra data fees.Viewing the data usage of apps1. Go to Settings, and then under Wireless & networks, tap More.2. Tap Usage.3. On the Mobile tab, drag the vertical line markers to see how much data you'veused during a particular time interval.4. Scroll down the screen to see a list of apps and their data usage info.5. Tap an app to see more details.Wi-FiTo use Wi-Fi, you need access to a wireless access point or “hotspot”.The availability and strength of a Wi-Fi signal varies depending on objects the Wi-Fisignal has to pass through (such as buildings or a wall between rooms).Turning Wi-Fi on and connecting to a wireless network1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. Tap the Wi-Fi tile to turn the Wi-Fi connection on.130 Internet connectionsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-130.png)
![3. Tap . Detected Wi-Fi networks will be listed.If the wireless network that you want is not listed, tap > Add network to manuallyadd it.4. Tap the Wi-Fi network you want to connect to. If you selected a securednetwork, you'll be asked to enter the network key or password.5. Tap Connect. You'll see the Wi-Fi icon in the status bar when connected.The next time HTC One max connects to a previously accessed secured wirelessnetwork, you won’t be asked to enter the key or other security information again.Preventing notifications from unsecured Wi-Fi networksYou can prevent getting notified by unsecured Wi-Fi networks.1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. If Wi-Fi connection is off, tap the Wi-Fi tile to turn it on.3. Tap . Detected Wi-Fi networks will be listed.4. Press and hold an unsecured Wi-Fi network you want to stop being notifiedabout, and tap Block network notification.5. To unblock an unsecured Wi-Fi network, press and hold the network name andtap Unblock network notification.Connecting to a Wi-Fi network via WPSIf you're using a Wi-Fi router with Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), you can connectHTC One max easily.1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. If Wi-Fi connection is off, tap the Wi-Fi tile to turn it on.3. Tap . Detected Wi-Fi networks will be listed.4. Tap > WPS Push, and then press the WPS button on your Wi-Fi router. To use the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) PIN method, tap > WPS Pin Entry.Disconnecting from the current wireless network1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. If Wi-Fi connection is off, tap the Wi-Fi tile to turn it on.3. Tap . Detected Wi-Fi networks will be listed.4. You can:§Tap the wireless network that HTC One max is connected to, and then tapDisconnect.§If you want to remove the settings for this network, press and hold thenetwork name, and then tap Forget network.131 Internet connectionsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-131.png)
![Connecting to a different Wi-Fi network1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. If Wi-Fi connection is off, tap the Wi-Fi tile to turn it on.3. Tap . Detected Wi-Fi networks will be listed.To manually scan for available Wi-Fi networks, tap > Scan.4. Tap a Wi-Fi network to connect to it.Logging into a public Wi-Fi network automatically (WISPr)You can set HTC One max to automatically log into a public Wi-Fi network that youregularly use. This saves you the trouble of going through the Wi-Fi provider's webauthentication every time you connect to their Wi-Fi network. Just add your logincredentials to the WISPr (Wireless Internet Service Provider roaming) settings.The access point of the Wi-Fi network needs to support the WISPr web portal.Consult the Wi-Fi provider for details.1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. If Wi-Fi connection is off, tap the Wi-Fi tile to turn it on.3. Tap . Detected Wi-Fi networks will be listed.4. Tap > Advanced.5. Under WISPr settings, select the Auto login option.6. Tap WISPr account settings > Add a new account.7. Tap each item onscreen to enter the service provider name, your login name(with the full domain name), and password.8. Tap > Save9. Turn Wi-Fi on, and then connect to the public Wi-Fi network.§If you have access to several public Wi-Fi networks, you can add up to five sets oflogin credentials to the WISPr accounts list.§In the WISPr accounts list, press and hold an account to remove or edit it.Connecting to a virtual private network (VPN)Add virtual private networks (VPNs) so you can connect and access resources insidea secured local network, such as your corporate network.Before you can connect to your organization's local network, you may be asked to:132 Internet connectionsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-132.png)
![§Install security certificates§Enter your login credentials§Download and install a required VPN app on HTC One maxContact your network administrator for details. Also, HTC One max must firstestablish a Wi-Fi or data connection before you can start a VPN connection.Adding a VPN connectionYou must first set a lock screen PIN or password before you can use credentialstorage and set up the VPN.1. Go to Settings, and then under Wireless & networks, tap More.2. Tap VPN > > Add VPN profile.3. Enter the VPN settings and set them up according to the security details yournetwork administrator gave you.4. Tap Save.Connecting to a VPN1. Go to Settings, and then under Wireless & networks, tap More.2. Tap VPN.3. Tap the VPN that you want to connect to.4. Enter your log in credentials, and then tap Connect. When you’re connected, theVPN connected icon appears in the notification area of the status bar.You can then open the web browser to access resources such as your corporatenetwork intranet.Disconnecting from a VPN1. Slide the Notifications panel open.2. Tap the VPN notification, and then tap Disconnect.133 Internet connectionsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-133.png)
![Using HTC One max as a wireless routerShare your data connection with other devices by turning HTC One max into awireless router.§Make sure the data connection is turned on.§You must have an approved data plan associated with your account from yourmobile service provider to use this service. Devices connected to your Wi-FiHotspot use data from your subscribed data plan.1. Go to Settings, and then under Wireless & networks, tap More.2. Tap Mobile network sharing > Portable Wi-Fi hotspot settings.3. Enter a router name or use the default router name.4. Choose the type of security and set the password (key) for your wireless router.If you selected None in Security, you don’t need to enter a password. The password is the key other people need to enter on their device so they canconnect and use HTC One max as a wireless router.5. Select the Portable Wi-Fi hotspot option to turn on the wireless router.HTC One max is ready to be used as a wireless router when you see on the statusbar.To help minimize security risks, use the default security settings and set a secureand unique password.134 Internet connectionsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-134.png)
![Sharing your phone's Internet connection byUSB tetheringNo Internet connection available for your computer? No problem. Use the dataconnection of HTC One max to connect to the Internet.§To make sure that the USB drivers for HTC One max are up-to-date, install thelatest version of HTC Sync Manager on your computer.§Make sure a SIM card with a data plan is inserted in HTC One max.§You may need to have USB tethering added to your data plan, and it may incuradditional cost. Contact your mobile service provider for details.§Make sure that mobile data is turned on.1. Go to Settings, and then under Wireless & networks, tap More.2. Tap Mobile network sharing > USB network setting > USB tethering. If you often switch between USB tethering and Internet pass-through, select Smartnetwork sharing to automatically turn on the connection type you need wheneveryou connect HTC One max with your computer.3. Connect HTC One max to your computer using the provided USB cable. Thenext time HTC One max connects to a computer, it will remember your settings.135 Internet connectionsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-135.png)
![Connecting to the Internet through acomputerIf you temporarily don’t have Internet access on HTC One max, you can still go onlineby using your computer’s Internet connection.§To make sure that the USB drivers for HTC One max are up-to-date, install thelatest version of HTC Sync Manager on your computer.§If your phone can't connect to the Internet via your computer's Internetconnection, you may need to configure your computer's firewall to allow this typeof connection. To find out how, refer to your operating system or security softwarehelp.§If your computer connects to the Internet via PPP (e.g. Dial UP, xDSL, or VPN),Internet Pass-through will only support TCP protocol.1. Go to Settings, and then under Wireless & networks, tap More.2. Tap Mobile network sharing > USB network setting > Internet pass-through. If you often switch between USB tethering and Internet pass-through, select Smartnetwork sharing to automatically turn on the connection type you need wheneveryou connect HTC One max with your computer.3. Connect HTC One max to your computer using the provided USB cable. Thenext time HTC One max connects to a computer, it will remember your settings.Wi-Fi printingConnect HTC One max to a supported printer via Wi-Fi and print out documents,email, photos, and more.Both printer and HTC One max must be turned on and connected to the same localnetwork. Connect HTC One max to the local network using Wi-Fi. To learn how toconnect the printer to a local network, refer to your printer user guide.1. While in an app (such as Mail or Calendar), open the item you want to print.2. Tap > Print (or More > Print).3. On the Print screen, tap the printer you want to use.136 Internet connectionsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-136.png)
![4. If there's more than one page to print, set the page range that you want. Tap Advanced to set the page size, print layout, and page orientation, and chooseif you want to print in color or black and white.5. Tap Print.You can check the printing details by opening the Notifications panel, and thentapping the item you're printing.Printing a photo1. While in Gallery, open the photo you want to print.2. Tap the photo.3. Tap > Print , and then tap the printer you want to use.4. Tap Print.You can check the printing details by opening the Notifications panel, and thentapping the item you're printing.Adding a printerIf your printer does not show up in the list, you must add it.The printer must be in the same Wi-Fi network that you are using.1. From the Print screen, tap Add printer.2. Enter the IP address of the printer that you want to add and choose a port. Ifyou do not know the IP address of the printer, ask for help from your networkadministrator.3. Tap Next, and then select the manufacturer and model of the printer.4. Tap Save.The printer appears on the list and you can tap it to print your photo or document.137 Internet connectionsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-137.png)
![Wireless sharingConnecting a Bluetooth headsetYou can listen to music over a Bluetooth stereo headset, or have hands-freeconversations using a compatible Bluetooth headset.§To listen to music with your headset, the headset must support the A2DPBluetooth profile.§Before you connect your headset, make it discoverable so HTC One max can findit. Refer to your headset manual for details.1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. If Bluetooth is off, tap the Bluetooth tile to turn it on.3. Tap . The Bluetooth screen opens.4. If you don't see your headset listed, tap and then tap Scan to refresh the list.5. When you see the name of your headset in the Available Devices section, tapthe name. HTC One max pairs with the headset and the headset connectionstatus is displayed in the Paired Devices section.If automatic pairing fails, enter the passcode supplied with your headset.When the Bluetooth headset is connected to HTC One max, the Bluetooth connectedicon is displayed in the status bar.Reconnecting a Bluetooth headsetNormally, you can easily reconnect your headset by switching on Bluetooth onHTC One max, and then turning on the headset.However, you might have to connect manually if your headset has been used withanother Bluetooth device.Make sure that the headset is discoverable. Refer to the headset manual for details.1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. If Bluetooth is off, tap the Bluetooth tile to turn it on.138 Wireless sharingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-138.png)
![3. Tap . The Bluetooth screen opens.4. Tap the headset’s name in the Paired Devices section.5. If prompted to enter a passcode, try 0000 or 1234, or consult the headsetdocumentation to find the passcode.If you still cannot reconnect to the headset, follow the instructions in Unpairing from aBluetooth device on page 139, and then follow the steps under Connecting aBluetooth headset on page 138.Unpairing from a Bluetooth device1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. If Bluetooth is off, tap the Bluetooth tile to turn it on.3. Tap . The Bluetooth screen opens.4. In the Paired devices section, tap next to the device to unpair.5. Tap Unpair.Where sent information is savedWhen you send information using Bluetooth, the location where it's saved depends onthe type of information and the receiving device.If you send a calendar event or contact, it is normally added directly to thecorresponding application on the receiving device.If you send another file type to a Windows computer, it is normally saved in theBluetooth Exchange folder within your personal document folders.§On Windows XP, the path may be: C:\Documents and Settings\[yourusername]\My Documents\Bluetooth Exchange§On Windows Vista®, the path may be: C:\Users\[your username]\Documents§On Windows 7, the path may be: C:\Users\[your username]\Documents\Bluetooth Exchange Folder§On Windows 8, the path may be: C:\Users\[your username]\DocumentsIf you send a file to another device, the saved location may depend on the file type.For example, if you send an image file to another mobile phone, it may be saved in afolder named “Images”.139 Wireless sharingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-139.png)
![Receiving files using BluetoothHTC One max lets you receive various files with Bluetooth, including photos, musictracks, contact info, calendar events, and documents such as PDFs.Refer to the device’s documentation for instructions on sending information overBluetooth.1. With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick Settings.2. If Bluetooth is off, tap the Bluetooth tile to turn it on.3. Tap . The Bluetooth screen opens.4. Tap the Bluetooth name of your device near the top of the screen to makeHTC One max visible to nearby Bluetooth devices.5. On the sending device, send one or more files to HTC One max.6. If asked, accept the pairing request on HTC One max and on the sending device.You may also be prompted to enter the same passcode or confirm the auto-generated passcode on both devices. You'll then get a Bluetooth authorization request.7. Tap Pair.8. When HTC One max receives a file transfer request notification, slide theNotifications panel down, tap the incoming file notification, and then tapAccept.9. When a file is transferred, a notification is displayed. Slide the Notifications paneldown, and then tap the relevant notification.When you open a received file, what happens next depends on the file type:§Media files and documents are usually opened directly in a compatible app. Forexample, if you open a music track, it starts playing in the Music app.§For a vCalendar file, choose the calendar where you want to save the event, andthen tap Import. The vCalendar is added to your Calendar events.§For a vCard contact file, you can choose to import one, several, or all of thosecontacts to your contacts list.140 Wireless sharingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-140.png)
![Sharing content with NFCWith built-in NFC (near field communication) on HTC One max, you can share contentto another NFC-capable mobile device in an instant. Beam webpages, photos, contactinformation, and more by holding HTC One max and the other device back to back.You can also use NFC for contactless payment. Availability of NFC paymentdepends on when your mobile operator launches this service. Contact your mobileoperator for details.Turning NFC on or off1. Go to Settings, and then under Wireless & networks, tap More.2. Select or clear the NFC option.141 Wireless sharingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-141.png)
![Beaming contentMake sure that both devices are unlocked and have NFC turned on. If the otherdevice has an Android Beam™ option, make sure it is also turned on.1. While viewing the content that you want to share, hold HTC One max and theother phone back to back. Make sure that the NFC area (shaded part) of HTC One max and the otherphone's NFC area are close to one another. Experiment by slightly moving thephones until a connection is made.2. Tap the screen.The shared content appears on the other screen. For some items that you've shared(such as contact information), additional instructions on how to save the item willappear on the receiving device.142 Wireless sharingOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-142.png)
![Settings and securityChecking your phone's HTC Sense versionYou can view the HTC Sense version, as well as other information about your phone.1. Go to Settings, and then tap About.2. Tap Software information to view the HTC Sense version.Turning Airplane mode on or offWhen you enable Airplane (Flight) mode, all wireless radios on HTC One max areturned off, including the call function, data services, Bluetooth, and Wi-Fi.When you disable Airplane mode, the call function is turned back on and the previousstate of Bluetooth and Wi-Fi is restored.§You can manually turn Bluetooth and Wi-Fi back on after enabling Airplane mode.§If USB tethering is turned on, enabling Airplane mode turns it off. You need tomanually turn USB tethering on after you disable Airplane mode.Do any of the following to turn Airplane mode on or off:§Press and hold POWER, and then tap Airplane mode.§With two fingers, swipe down from the status bar to open Quick settings. Tap theAirplane mode tile to turn airplane mode on or off.When enabled, the Airplane mode icon is displayed in the status bar.Turning Do not disturb mode on and offUse Do not disturb mode to reject calls, and silence audible alerts and notifications,but still want to have a data connection available.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Sound.2. Tap the Do not disturb On/Off switch to turn it on and off.3. Tap Do not disturb to set an auto turn off time or to allow the Clock app alarmand timer sounds to play when Do not disturb is on.The Do not disturb icon will appear in the notifications area of the status bar. Evenwhen Do not disturb mode is on, you'll still see notification icons in the status bar toalert you of missed calls, new messages, calendar events, alarms, and othernotifications.143 Settings and securityOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-143.png)
![Allowing incoming calls to bypass Do not disturb modeAdd important contacts to an exceptions list so that you can still receive their callseven when Do not disturb mode is on.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Sound.2. Tap Do not disturb.3. Select the checkbox to allow incoming calls from contacts on the exceptionslist.4. Tap Do not disturb exceptions and then tap .5. Choose whether to select contacts or groups to add to the exceptions list, or tomanually add a phone number that's not available in your contact info. To remove contacts or numbers from the exceptions list, tap > Remove contact.Turning automatic screen rotation offAutomatic rotation is not supported in all applications.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Display, gestures & buttons (or Display & buttons).2. Clear the Auto rotate screen option.Screen not rotating?Recalibrate the screen if you feel that the screen orientation does not respondproperly to the way you hold HTC One max.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Display, gestures & buttons (or Display &buttons).2. Tap G-Sensor calibration.3. Place HTC One max on a flat and level surface, and then tap Calibrate.4. After the recalibration process, tap OK.144 Settings and securityOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-144.png)
![Adjusting the time before the screen turns offAfter a period of inactivity, the screen turns off to conserve battery power. You canset the idle time before the screen turns off.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Display, gestures & buttons (or Display & buttons).2. Tap Sleep, and then tap the time before the screen turns off.Adjusting the screen brightness1. Go to Settings, and then tap Display, gestures & buttons (or Display & buttons).2. With the Automatic brightness option selected, drag the slider to set themaximum brightness level. This sets a limit on how bright the screen will bewhen Automatic brightness is selected.3. To set the brightness manually, clear the Automatic brightness option, and thendrag the brightness slider to the left to decrease or to the right to increase thescreen brightness.Touch sounds and vibrationSome people like the sound or vibration feedback they get when touching the screen,and some don't. You can turn on or off various types of touch sounds and vibration onHTC One max.§Touch tones when tapping the phone dial pad§Touch sounds when tapping onscreen items§Screen lock sounds§Pull-to-refresh sounds§Vibration when pressing hardware buttons§Touch sound and vibration when tapping the HTC Sense keyboardTurning touch sounds and vibration on and off1. Go to Settings, and then tap Sound.2. Under System, select the option you want to turn on or off.Turning off keyboard sounds and vibration1. Go to Settings, and then tap Language & keyboard.2. Tap HTC Sense Input3. Tap Sound feedback and then select None to turn off keyboard sounds.4. Clear the Vibration feedback option to turn off keyboard vibration.145 Settings and securityOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-145.png)
![Changing the display languageChanging the language adjusts the keyboard layout, date and time formatting, andmore.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Language & keyboard.2. Tap System language, and then choose the language you want to use.Accessibility settingsUse these settings when you’ve downloaded and installed an accessibility tool, such asa screen reader that provides voice feedback. You can turn accessibility functions orservices on or off.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Accessibility.2. Choose the settings you want.Magnifying your phone's screenIf you're visually impaired or would just like to get a closer view of what's on thescreen, use Magnification gestures to enlarge portions of your phone's screen.Turning Magnification gestures on or off1. Go to Settings, and then tap Accessibility.2. Tap Magnification gestures, and then tap the On/Off switch to turn it on or off.Using Magnification gesturesMake sure that Magnification gestures is turned on in Settings to use this feature.Triple-tap on any area of the screen that you want to magnify. You can:§Slide two fingers apart or together to adjust the magnification.§Drag two fingers to pan across the screen.To exit magnification mode, open another app or triple-tap the screen again.146 Settings and securityOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-146.png)
![Working with certificatesUse client and Certificate Authority (CA) digital certificates to enable HTC One max toaccess VPN or secured Wi-FI networks, and also to provide authentication to onlinesecure servers. You can get a certificate from your system administrator or downloadit from sites that require authentication.Some apps such as your browser or email client let you install certificates directly inthe app. See the app's help for details.Installing a digital certificateYou must set a lock screen PIN or password before installing a digital certificate.1. Save the certificate file in the root folder on HTC One max.2. Go to Settings, and then tap Security.3. Tap Install from storage.4. If you have more than one certificate in the root folder, select the certificate youwant to install.5. Enter a name for the certificate and tap OK.Protecting your SIM card with a PINAdd another layer of security for HTC One max by assigning a PIN (personalidentification number) to your SIM.Make sure you have the default SIM PIN provided by your mobile operator beforecontinuing.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Security.2. Tap Set up SIM card lock, then select Lock SIM card.3. Enter the default SIM card PIN, and then tap OK.4. To change the SIM card PIN, tap Change SIM PIN.147 Settings and securityOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-147.png)
![Restoring a SIM card that has been locked outIf you enter the wrong PIN more times than the maximum number of attemptsallowed, your SIM card will become “PUK-locked.”You need a PUK code to restore access to HTC One max. Contact your mobileoperator for this code.1. On the Phone dialer screen, enter the PUK code, and then tap Next.2. Enter the new PIN you want to use, and then tap Next.3. Enter the new PIN again, and then tap OK.Showing or hiding notifications on the lockscreenChoose the types of notifications to show or hide on the lock screen.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Security.2. Under Lock screen, tap Notification settings.3. Choose whether to show or hide notifications such as missed calls, textmessages, upcoming calendar events, and more.Protecting HTC One max with a screen lockHelp protect your personal information and help prevent others from usingHTC One max without your permission.Choose to set a screen lock pattern, numeric PIN, or other means of securing yourphone. You'll be asked to unlock the screen every time HTC One max is turned on orwhen it’s idle for a certain period of time.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Security.2. Tap Screen lock.3. Select a screen lock option and set up the screen lock.4. Tap Lock phone after, then specify the idle time before the screen is locked. You can also clear Make pattern visible or Make passwords visible if you don’t wantyour screen lock to display as you enter it onscreen.148 Settings and securityOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-148.png)
![Forgot your screen lock pattern?If you’ve forgotten your screen lock pattern, you have up to five attempts totry and unlock HTC One max.If this fails, you can unlock HTC One max by entering your Google Accountuser name and password.1. On the unlock screen, enter your lock pattern.2. After the fifth attempt, when you’re asked to wait for 30 seconds, tapOK.3. If the display goes off, press the POWER button to turn the display backon, and then unlock the screen.4. Tap the Forgot pattern? button when it appears.5. Enter your Google Account name and password, and then tap Sign in.You’ll then be asked to create a new screen lock pattern. If you nolonger want to do so, tap None or press .Securing HTC One max with face unlockSet up face unlock if you want to unlock HTC One max by simply looking at it.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Security.2. Tap Screen lock > Face Unlock.3. Tap Set it up and follow the onscreen instructions.4. Choose a backup unlock method to use in case the phone doesn't recognizeyou.5. Tap Lock phone after, and then specify the idle time before the screen is locked.To help make face unlock more reliable and secure, you can:§Tap Improve face matching to train HTC One max to recognize your face indifferent situations, such as when you're wearing glasses or sporting a beard.§Select the Liveness check option to require eye blinking when unlocking thescreen.149 Settings and securityOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-149.png)
![Bypassing the lock screenIf you've set a screen lock for HTC One max, you can just skip the lock screen and gostraight to the security screen for unlocking HTC One max.1. Go to Settings, and then tap Security.2. Select the Bypass lock screen on wake option.150 Settings and securityOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-150.png)
![Trademarks and copyrights©2013 HTC Corporation. All Rights Reserved.HTC, the HTC logo, HTC One, HTC BlinkFeed, HTC Sense, and HTC Zoe aretrademarks or service marks of HTC Corporation.Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Android Market, Google Apps,Google Calendar, Google Checkout, Google Earth, Google Latitude, Google Maps,Google Play, Google Talk, Google Wallet, Gmail, Picasa, and YouTube are trademarksof Google Inc.Microsoft, Windows, ActiveSync, Excel, Outlook, PowerPoint, Windows Media, andWindows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of MicrosoftCorporation in the United States and/or other countries.The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by BluetoothSIG, Inc.Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.LTE is a trademark of European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI).Facebook is a trademark of Facebook, Inc.Twitter is a trademark of Twitter, Inc., and is used under license.FLICKR and the FLICKR Dots logo are the trademarks and/or registered trademarksof Yahoo! Inc.DLNA and the DLNA disc logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of DigitalLiving Network Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.iPhone, iCal, iTunes, and Mac are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.Polaris Office is a trademark of Infraware, Inc.All other company, product and service names mentioned herein are trademarks,registered trademarks or service marks of their respective owners. Not all marks listednecessarily appear in this User Guide.The HTC Sync Manager software can be used with materials that you own or arelawfully authorized to use and/or duplicate. Unauthorized use and/or duplication ofcopyrighted material may be a violation of copyright law in the United States and/orother countries/regions. Violation of U.S. and international copyright laws may subjectyou to significant civil and/or criminal penalties. HTC Corporation shall not be heldresponsible for any damages or losses (direct or indirect) that you may incur as aresult of using this software.Screen images contained herein are simulated. HTC shall not be liable for technical oreditorial errors or omissions contained herein, nor for incidental or consequentialdamages resulting from furnishing this material. The information is provided “as is”without warranty of any kind and is subject to change without notice. HTC also151 Trademarks and copyrightsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-151.png)
![reserves the right to revise the content of this document at any time without priornotice.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by anymeans, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording or storing in aretrieval system, or translated into any language in any form without prior writtenpermission of HTC.152 Trademarks and copyrightsOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-152.png)
![IndexAAirplane mode 143Alarms- setting 119Android BeamSee NFCAndroid MarketSee Google PlayApps- arranging 50- grouping into a folder 51- hiding or unhiding 52- icons on Home screen 49- installing 117, 118- non-Google Play apps 118- on All Apps screen 50- on Home screen 49- restoring 118- uninstalling 118- updating 20BBackup- restoring backed up apps 118Battery- charging 12- checking usage 37- saving battery power 37Bluetooth- connecting a Bluetooth headset 138- received file location 139- receiving information 140Browser- bookmarks 75- history 76, 77- incognito tab 77- Reading list or Watch list 74- syncing with Google Chrome 76- tabs 74- using 73- viewing desktop version 73Burst mode 43CCalendar- creating an event 121- dual time zone 120- meeting conflicts 121- meeting invitations 122- reminders 123- sending quick response 123- views 120Call history 59Camera- basics 41, 42- continuous shooting 43- effects 42- flash 42- front camera 41- HDR 45- recording a video 42- scenes 44- self portrait 44- slow motion 46- standby 41- sweep panorama 45- taking a photo 42- taking photo while recording 43- video resolution 42- zooming 41Capture screen 29Car- about 113- handling calls 115- HTC Car Kit 113- Internet radio 114- navigation 115- playing music 114- voice commands 113Change phone language 146Clock- alarm 119- setting date and time 119153 IndexOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-153.png)
![Conference call 59Contacts- adding 96- copying contacts 17, 97- copying from SIM card 97- importing contacts 17, 97, 98- transferring contacts 17, 97Continuous shooting 43Copying files- files to computer, phone storage, orstorage card 90Copying- text 32DData connection- access point names (APN) 128- data roaming 129- sharing 135- turning on or off 128- usage 129Data transfer- from Android phone 15- from iPhone and other phones 16- transferring contacts 17Display- G-sensor 144- changing the time before the screenturns off 145- recalibrating G-sensor 144- screen brightness 145- screen rotation 144- Sleep mode 26DLNA 89DrivingSee CarEElectronic program guide- setting up 82, 85EmailSee MailEPGSee Electronic program guideExchange ActiveSync- flagging an email 107- meeting request 107- Out of office 107- sending a meeting request 107expanded storage 90FFace unlock 149Files- copying to computer, phone storage,or storage card 90Finger gestures 21Fingerprint- about 18- adding, removing, or editing 19- scrolling with 19FirmwareSee Software updateFM Radio- using 124Folder- grouping apps 51- grouping bookmarks 75- removing items 52- renaming 51FOTASee Software updateGGestures- motion gestures 25- touch gestures 21Gmail 102Google Maps 109Google Now- setting up 71- turning off 72Google Play- installing apps 117- refund 118Google Voice Search 70GPS (Global Positioning System)See Location settingsGroup messaging 64HHands free 138HDMI 88HDR 45154 IndexOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-154.png)
![HeadphonesSee BluetoothHome screen- widgets 48- adding, removing, or arrangingwidget panels 52- apps 49- changing your main Home screen 53- folder 51- launch bar 48- rearranging widgets and icons 50- removing widgets and icons 50- shortcuts 49- wallpaper 47HotspotSee Wireless routerHTC CarSee CarHTC Clock- setting an alarm 119HTC Media Link HD 88HTC Sense version 143HTC Zoe 44IIdle screenSee Lock screenIncognito modeSee Browser, incognito tabInternet- browsing 73- connections 128Internet connection- data connection 128- VPN 132- Wi-Fi 130- wireless router 134KKeyboard- dictionary 35- entering text 33- entering text by speaking 36- HTC Sense keyboard 33- layout 34- multi-language keyboard 34- predictive text 34- shortcuts 35- speech recognition 36Kid mode- about 125- choosing apps 125- closing 125LLanguage- system language 146Location settings 109Lock screen- answering a call 57- dismissing an alarm 27- opening an app 27- rejecting a call 57- unlocking 27Low battery 37Low storage 90MMail- attachments 105- carbon copy, blind copy (cc,bcc) 105- deleting 106- draft 105- replying 105- searching 106- sending 105- sorting 106Mail folders- moving email messages 106Making calls- calling 54- calling a number in a Calendarevent 56- calling a number in a message 56- calling a number in an email 56Maps- Google Maps 109MarketSee Google PlayMeeting request 107Messages- block box 68- copying to the SIM card 69- deleting a conversation 69155 IndexOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-155.png)
![- draft message 62, 65- forwarding 66- group SMS 64- locking 69- replying 65- saving as task 66- secure box 67- sending 62microSD card 11MMSSee Multimedia messageMobile data 128Multimedia message- attachment 62- group MMS 64- sending 62Music- adding a song to a queue 80- album covers 80- artist photos 80- listening 78- lyrics 81- playing music from the Lockscreen 78- playlist 79- setting a song as ringtone 80- SoundHound 82NNavigationSee CarNFC (Near Field Communication) 141Notifications- panel 31PPair a Bluetooth headset 138Panorama 45Panoramic photo 45People- adding a new contact 96- contact groups 100- contact link suggestions 98- copying contacts 17, 97, 98- editing contacts 97- filtering your contacts 94- groups 100- importing contacts 17, 97- merging contact information 98- personal profile 95- sending contact information 99- transferring contacts 17, 97Phone calls- blocking a call 60- call history 59- calling 54- calling a number in a Calendarevent 56- calling a number in a message 56- calling a number in an email 56- conference call 59- emergency call 56- extension number 55- missed calls 55- muting the microphone 58- putting a call on hold 58- receiving calls 57- Smart Dial 54- speakerphone 58- speed dial 55Phone information 143Phone settingsSee SettingsPhone updates 20Photos- transferring from computer 17Power- charging the battery 12- checking battery usage 37- saving power 37- sleep mode 26Print screenSee Capture screenPrinting 136PUK (PIN Unblock Key) 148QQuick settings 28RRadioSee FM RadioReading list 74Recording your voice 127Remote control 85156 IndexOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-156.png)
![Ring volume- lowering ring volumeautomatically 60- making your phone ring louder 60- Pocket mode 60Ringtone- editing 81- setting song as ringtone 80RouterSee Wireless routerSScenes- in Camera app 44Screen- adjusting brightness 145- capture 29- changing the time before the screenturns off 145- idle screen 27- recalibrating G-sensor 144- rotation 144- Sleep mode settings 145Screen lock 148Screen shotSee Capture screenSD card 11Search- searching phone and Web 70- voice search 70Security- fingerprint 18- protecting phone with screenlock 148- protecting SIM card with PIN 147- security certificates 132Sense TV- about 82- checking on-demand video 85- electronic program guide (EPG) 83- scheduling 84- setting up 82Settings- About 143- Accessibility 146- display language 146- Storage 90Setup- contacts from old phone 17- initial setup 14- photos, music, videos from oldphone 17Sharing- events 122- text 32- TV 88Shortcuts 27SIM card- copying messages to 69- inserting 10- removing 11- SIM PIN 147Sleep mode 26Slideshow- MMS 63Slow motion video 46Smart network sharing 135, 136SMSSee MessagesSoftware update 20Sound- lowering ring volumeautomatically 60- Pocket mode 60- ringtone, notifications, and alarm 53- switching profiles 60Speakerphone 58Speed dial 55Storage 90Sweep panorama 45TTasks- about 126- creating a task 126- managing 126- managing lists 127TetheringSee USB TetheringText message 62TVSee Sense TV157 IndexOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-157.png)
![UUpgradeSee Software updateUSB Tethering 135VVideoPic 43Videos- recording 42- taking photo while recording 43- transferring from computer 17Voice input 36Voice Recorder 127Voice search 70VPN- adding a connection 133- connecting 133- disconnecting 133WWallpaper- changing 47Watch list 74Weather- checking weather 119Wi-Fi- connecting to another network 132- connecting via WPS 131- turning on 130Widgets- adding 48- changing settings 49- rearranging 50- removing 50- resizing 49Wireless display 88Wireless router 134Word prediction- bilingual prediction 35YYouTube- finding videos of songs 82- preloading 124- watching 123158 IndexOnly for certification Only for certification Only for certification](https://usermanual.wiki/HTC/0P3P500.User-Manual-1/User-Guide-2094394-Page-158.png)